WO2018129875A1 - 一种通信路径转换方法及设备 - Google Patents

一种通信路径转换方法及设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018129875A1
WO2018129875A1 PCT/CN2017/091138 CN2017091138W WO2018129875A1 WO 2018129875 A1 WO2018129875 A1 WO 2018129875A1 CN 2017091138 W CN2017091138 W CN 2017091138W WO 2018129875 A1 WO2018129875 A1 WO 2018129875A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
user equipment
message
network device
eremote
communication
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2017/091138
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
徐海博
邝奕如
坦尼纳坦•爱德华
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to CN201780014150.XA priority Critical patent/CN109417695B/zh
Priority to EP17891329.9A priority patent/EP3562182B1/en
Priority to US16/476,740 priority patent/US10945179B2/en
Publication of WO2018129875A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018129875A1/zh
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/14—Direct-mode setup
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0011—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection
    • H04W36/0016—Hand-off preparation specially adapted for end-to-end data sessions
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0061—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link of neighbour cell information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/03—Reselecting a link using a direct mode connection
    • H04W36/033—Reselecting a link using a direct mode connection in pre-organised networks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/24—Connectivity information management, e.g. connectivity discovery or connectivity update
    • H04W40/248—Connectivity information update
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/34—Modification of an existing route
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00—Network data management
    • H04W8/02—Processing of mobility data, e.g. registration information at HLR [Home Location Register] or VLR [Visitor Location Register]; Transfer of mobility data, e.g. between HLR, VLR or external networks
    • H04W8/08—Mobility data transfer
    • H04W8/14—Mobility data transfer between corresponding nodes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/14—Reselecting a network or an air interface
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02—Terminal devices
    • H04W88/04—Terminal devices adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a communication path conversion method and device.
  • a UE may directly connect to the base station, communicate with the base station in a direct connection manner, or may communicate with the base station through a relay UE (Relay UE), and the UE that communicates with the base station through the Relay UE may be referred to as a remote end.
  • UE Remote UE
  • the standardized Relay UE forwards data between the Remote UE and the base station through an Internet Protocol (IP) layer, Layer 3, which may be called Layer 3 Relay.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • Layer 3 Relay Layer 3 Relay.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • the relay link that the UE communicates with the base station is generally determined by the application layer of the Remote UE to decide when to convert the data communication from the cellular link to the relay link, and the continuity of the service before and after the conversion cannot be guaranteed.
  • Relay mode which is also a research topic in LTE Rel 15.
  • the manner of performing data forwarding above the RLC layer of the Relay UE and below the PDCP layer may be referred to as Layer 2 UE-to-NW Relay, that is, the new use of the Relay UE.
  • the layer that forwards data to the base station is considered to be layer 2.
  • the Remote UE may be referred to as an evolved remote user equipment (Evolved Remote UE), and the Relay UE may be referred to as an evolved relay user equipment (Evolved Relay UE, eRelay UE or Evolved UE-to-NW).
  • Relay the newly added layer is referred to as an adaptation layer, that is, data received from the Remote UE is forwarded to the base station through the adaptation layer of the Relay UE, and the data does not reach the PDCP layer, so that the Relay UE does not obtain data.
  • the content guarantees the security of the data at the Relay UE.
  • the eRemote UE is to perform path switching, for example, to convert from a cellular path that communicates directly with the base station to a relay path that communicates with the base station through the eRelay UE, or the application layer of the eRemote UE (Application layer)
  • path switching for example, to convert from a cellular path that communicates directly with the base station to a relay path that communicates with the base station through the eRelay UE, or the application layer of the eRemote UE (Application layer)
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a communication path conversion method and device, which are used to solve the technical problem that the eRemote UE does not continue to be serviced after the link conversion.
  • a communication path conversion method is provided, which is performed by a first user equipment, such as an eRemote UE.
  • the method further involves a second user equipment, such as an eRelay UE.
  • the method includes: the first user equipment sends a first message to the first network device, where the first message is used to request that the communication path between the first user equipment and the first network device is straight
  • the connected path is converted to an indirect path that communicates with the second network device through the second user equipment.
  • the first user equipment receives the second message sent by the first network device, where the second message carries at least one of the first indication information and the first bearer configuration information used to notify the first user equipment of the communication path transition.
  • the first user equipment performs communication path conversion according to the first indication information.
  • the first message includes a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, an identifier of the first user equipment, and a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment.
  • the first network device and the second network device are the same network device or different network devices.
  • the network device sends a second message to the first user equipment, indicating that the first user equipment converts the communication path from the direct connection path to the indirect connection path. That is, when the network device indicates the first user equipment to perform path conversion, instead of determining, by the first user equipment, when to perform the conversion, the network device can perform scheduling according to the service, thereby ensuring that the first user equipment is in the path conversion as much as possible. Continuity of business before and after.
  • the first message further includes at least one of a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, and an identifier of the first user equipment, even if the data is forwarded through the adaptation, without
  • the IP layer may also enable the network device to determine the second user equipment and/or the first user equipment by using the manner provided by the embodiment of the present invention, so that the network device may configure the radio bearer for the second user equipment and/or the first user equipment, or The network device can then send downlink data to the second user equipment and/or the first user equipment.
  • the first bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one first radio bearer and the at least one second radio bearer, and at least one first The radio bearers the configuration of the corresponding radio link control entity and logical channel.
  • the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment
  • the second radio bearer is a radio for a communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device Hosted.
  • the content included in the first bearer configuration information is explained, so that the first user equipment can be configured according to the first bearer configuration information.
  • the network device may configure the radio bearer between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE according to the quality of service (QoS) requirement of the service of the eRemote UE.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the method further includes: if the second The message includes the first indication information, and the first user equipment enables an adaptation layer for processing data transmitted between the second user equipment and the second network device; if the second message includes the first bearer configuration information, The first user equipment reconfigures the radio link control entity and the logical channel of the first radio bearer according to the first bearer configuration information.
  • the first user equipment can perform corresponding processing, so that the conversion of the communication path can be successfully completed.
  • the first user equipment Before the sending, by the network device, the first message, the first user equipment establishes a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • the first user equipment first establishes a communication connection with the second user equipment, and then sends a first message to the first network device.
  • the first user equipment receives After the second message sent by the network device, the method further includes: establishing, by the first user equipment, a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • the first user equipment first sends a first message to the first network device, and then establishes a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • the second network device is the same network device as the first network device. Then, after the first user equipment receives the second message sent by the first network device, the method further includes: the first user equipment continues to perform data communication with the first network device by using the direct connection path. The first user equipment establishes a communication connection with the second user equipment. The first user equipment sends a third message to the first network device by using the second user equipment, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed, and the first user equipment disconnects the direct connection path with the first network device. .
  • the first user equipment maintains a direct connection path with the first network device, and after the communication path conversion is completed, the first user equipment then disconnects the direct connection path with the first network device, and then To communicate through the indirectly connected path, the service interruption of the first user equipment is avoided to ensure the continuity of the service.
  • the second network device is a different network device from the first network device, and the second message includes information used to indicate that the first user device switches to the second network device.
  • the method further includes: the first user equipment continues to perform data communication with the first network device by using the direct connection path; and the first user equipment establishes with the second user equipment. a communication connection; the first user equipment sends a third message to the second network device by using the second user equipment, the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed, and the first user equipment is disconnected from the first network device Direct connection path.
  • the first user device may maintain a direct connection path with the first network device until the communication path conversion is completed.
  • the user equipment then disconnects the direct connection path with the first network device, and then performs communication through the non-directly connected path, thereby avoiding service interruption of the first user equipment and ensuring continuity of services.
  • the seventh possible implementation of the first aspect The second network device is a different network device from the first network device, and the second message includes information used to indicate that the first user device switches to the second network device. Then, after the first user equipment receives the second message sent by the first network device, the method further includes: the first user equipment switching from the first network device to the second network device according to the indication of the second message. The first user equipment establishes a communication connection with the second user equipment. The first user equipment sends a third message to the second network device by using the second user equipment, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed.
  • the first user device first performs handover of the network device, that is, switches from the first network device to The second network device, after which the first user device establishes a communication connection with the second user device to complete the conversion from the direct connection path to the indirect direct path. That is, if the network device in the direct connection path and the network device in the indirect direct path are different network devices, the first user device may directly establish a connection with the second user device, or may also switch to the second network. After the device establishes a connection with the second user equipment, different processing modes can be flexibly selected according to different situations.
  • the eighth possible implementation of the first aspect The method further includes: acquiring, by the first user equipment, a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and an identifier of the second user equipment in a discovery process with the second user equipment; or, the first user equipment is Acquiring the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and the identifier of the second user equipment in the process of establishing the communication connection; or the first user equipment acquiring the second user equipment after establishing a communication connection with the second user equipment The cell identity of the serving cell and the second user equipment identity.
  • the first user equipment can obtain the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and the identifier of the second user equipment in a plurality of different manners, which is flexible.
  • a communication path conversion method is provided, the method being performed by a second user equipment, such as an eRelay UE.
  • the method further involves a first user equipment, such as an eRemote UE.
  • the method includes: a second user setting And receiving, by the second network device, a fourth message, where the fourth message carries second indication information and/or second bearer configuration information, used to notify the second user equipment to provide the indirect path support for the first user equipment, and The third bearer configuration information and the identifier of the first user equipment.
  • the second user equipment configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first user equipment according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the identifier of the first user equipment, and according to the identifier of the first user equipment and
  • the third bearer configuration information is configured to transmit the data bearer of the first user equipment and the radio bearer of the signaling on the communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device.
  • the network device sends a fourth message to the second user equipment, indicating that the second user equipment provides the indirect path support for the first user equipment, that is, The network device indicates when the first user equipment and the second user equipment perform path conversion, instead of determining, by the first user equipment, when to perform the conversion, the network equipment can perform scheduling according to the service, thereby ensuring the first user equipment as much as possible.
  • the bearer configuration information is sent by the network device to the second user equipment, that is, the network device configures the radio bearer for the second user equipment, so that the QoS of the first user equipment and the second user equipment can be guaranteed.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer, where the at least one third radio bearer corresponds to The configuration of the radio link control entity and logical channel.
  • the third bearer configuration information includes: a configuration of a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer.
  • the third radio bearer is a radio bearer for transmitting data and signaling of the first user equipment on a communication link between the second user equipment and the first user equipment, where the fourth radio bearer is used for the second user equipment. And a communication link between the second network device transmits the data bearer of the first user equipment and the radio bearer of the signaling.
  • the network device can configure the radio bearer for the eRelay UE according to the QoS requirements of the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE, and help ensure the QoS of the eRemote UE service.
  • the second user equipment according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the first user equipment Identifying, configuring a radio bearer of the communication link with the first user equipment, and configuring the communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device according to the identifier of the first user equipment and the third bearer configuration information Transmitting the data of the first user equipment and the radio bearer of the signaling, if the second message includes the second indication information, the second user equipment is enabled to process the data transmitted between the first user equipment and the second network equipment a first adaptation layer; if the fourth message includes the second bearer configuration information, the second user equipment establishes a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer; and the second user equipment re-establishes or re-establishes Configuring a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio
  • the second user equipment can perform corresponding processing, so that the first user equipment can successfully complete the conversion of the communication path.
  • the method further includes: the second user equipment is Sending, to the first user equipment, the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and the identifier of the second user equipment in the process of the first user equipment; or establishing a communication connection with the first user equipment Transmitting, to the first user equipment, the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and the identifier of the second user equipment; or the second user equipment, after establishing a communication connection with the first user equipment, The cell identifier of the serving cell and the identifier of the second user equipment are sent to the first user equipment.
  • the second user equipment may select a different time to send the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and the identifier of the second user equipment to the first user equipment, which is more flexible.
  • the method further includes: acquiring, by the second user equipment, the identifier of the first user equipment.
  • the second user equipment sends a fifth message to the network device, where the fifth message carries at least one of an identifier of the first user equipment and an identifier of the second user equipment.
  • the network device can determine the second user equipment and/or the first user equipment according to the identifier of the device, so that the network device can be the first The second user equipment and/or the first user equipment configures the radio bearer, or the network device can subsequently send downlink data to the second user equipment and/or the first user equipment.
  • a communication path conversion method is provided, the method being performed by a first network device.
  • the method includes: receiving, by the first network device, a first message sent by the first user equipment, where the first message is used to request to convert a communication path between the first user equipment and the first network device from a direct connection path to a second user
  • the first network device sends a second message to the first user equipment, where the second message carries the first indication information used to notify the first user equipment to perform the communication path conversion.
  • the first message includes a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, an identifier of the first user equipment, and a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment.
  • At least one of communication technologies; the first network device and the second network device are the same network device or different network devices.
  • the first network device sends a second message to the first user equipment, indicating that the first user equipment converts the communication path from the direct connection path to the indirect direct path. That is, when the first user equipment indicates the first user equipment to perform path conversion, instead of determining, by the first user equipment, when to perform the conversion, the first network equipment can be scheduled according to the service, thereby ensuring the first The continuity of the service of a user equipment before and after the path conversion.
  • the first message further includes at least one of a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, and an identifier of the first user equipment, even if the data is forwarded through the adaptation, without
  • the IP layer may also enable the first network device to determine the second user device and/or the first user device by using the manner provided by the embodiment of the present invention, so that the first network device may be configured for the second user device and/or the first user device.
  • the radio bearer, or the first network device may subsequently send downlink data to the second user equipment and/or the first user equipment.
  • the second message further carries the first bearer configuration information, where the first bearer configuration information includes: at least one first radio bearer and at least one second radio bearer A mapping relationship between the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment
  • the second radio bearer is a radio for a communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device Hosted.
  • the content included in the first bearer configuration information is explained, so that the first user equipment can be configured according to the first bearer configuration information.
  • the first network device can configure the radio bearer between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE according to the QoS requirement of the service of the eRemote UE, which helps to ensure The QoS of the eRemote UE's service.
  • the first network device receives the first message sent by the first user equipment
  • the first network device sends a fourth message to the second user equipment, where the fourth message carries the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information used to notify the second user equipment to provide the indirect path support for the first user equipment.
  • the second bearer configuration information is used by the second user equipment to configure the radio bearer.
  • the network device sends a fourth message to the second user equipment, indicating that the second user equipment provides non-direct path support for the first user equipment, that is, by the network device.
  • the network equipment can perform scheduling according to the service, thereby ensuring that the first user equipment is in the path as much as possible.
  • the continuity of the business before and after the conversion is sent by the network device to the second user equipment, that is, the network device configures the radio bearer for the second user equipment, so that the first user equipment can be guaranteed.
  • QoS of the second user equipment is sent by the network device to the second user equipment.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer And a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer, and a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer.
  • the third radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the second user equipment and the first user equipment
  • the fourth radio bearer is a communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device. Wireless bearer.
  • the first network device and the second network device are different network devices. Then, before the first network device sends the second message to the first user equipment, the method further includes: if the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment carried in the first message indicates that the serving cell is a cell deployed under the second network device, The first network device sends a sixth message to the second network device, where the sixth message is used to request to switch the first user equipment from the first network device to the second network device, and the first network device receives the seventh information sent by the second network device The seventh message carries the first bearer configuration information. The sixth message carries the information carried in the first message.
  • the first network device may request the second network device to switch the first user device from the first network device to the second device.
  • Network equipment to successfully complete the conversion of the communication path.
  • a user equipment comprising a transmitter, a receiver, and a processor.
  • the transmitter is configured to send a first message to the first network device, where the first message is used to request that the communication path between the user equipment and the first network device be converted from the direct connection path to the second user equipment and the second network.
  • the indirect path of device communication includes a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, an identifier of the user equipment, and a communication technology used by the communication link between the user equipment and the second user equipment.
  • At least one of the first network device and the second network device is the same network device or a different network device.
  • the receiver is configured to receive a second message sent by the first network device, where the second message carries at least one of first indication information and first bearer configuration information used to notify the user equipment to perform communication path conversion.
  • the processor is configured to perform communication path conversion according to the first indication information.
  • the first bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one first radio bearer and the at least one second radio bearer, and at least one first The radio bearers the configuration of the corresponding radio link control entity and logical channel.
  • the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the user equipment and the second user equipment
  • the second radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device .
  • the processor is further configured to: after the receiver receives the second message sent by the first network device, The second message includes the first indication information, and the adaptation layer for processing data transmitted between the second user equipment and the second network device is enabled. And if the second message includes the first bearer configuration information, the radio link control entity and the logical channel of the first radio bearer are reconfigured according to the first bearer configuration information.
  • the processor is further configured to: Before the network device sends the first message, establish a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • the processor is further configured to: receive, at the receiver After the second message sent by the network device, a communication connection is established with the second user equipment.
  • the second The network device is the same network device as the first network device.
  • the processor is further configured to: after the receiver receives the second message sent by the first network device, continue to enter the first network device through the direct connection path Line data communication, establishing a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: send, by the second user equipment, a third message to the first network device, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed.
  • the processor is further configured to: disconnect the direct connection path with the first network device.
  • the second The network device is a different network device from the first network device, and the second message includes information indicating that the user device switches to the second network device.
  • the processor is further configured to: after the receiver receives the second message sent by the first network device, continue to perform data communication with the first network device through the direct connection path, and establish a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: send, by the second user equipment, a third message to the second network device, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed.
  • the processor is further configured to: disconnect the direct connection path with the first network device.
  • the second The network device is a different network device from the first network device, and the second message includes information indicating that the user device switches to the second network device.
  • the processor is further configured to: after the receiver receives the second message sent by the first network device, switch from the first network device to the second network device according to the indication of the second message, and establish a communication connection with the second user device.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: send, by the second user equipment, a third message to the second network device, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed.
  • the processor The method further includes: acquiring, in a discovery process with the second user equipment, a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and an identifier of the second user equipment; or acquiring in a process of establishing a communication connection with the second user equipment The cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and the identifier of the second user equipment; or, after establishing a communication connection with the second user equipment, acquiring the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment and the identifier of the second user equipment.
  • a user equipment comprising a receiver and a processor.
  • the receiver is configured to receive the fourth message sent by the second network device, where the fourth message carries the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information that is used to notify the user equipment to provide the indirect path support for the first user equipment. And, the third bearer configuration information and the identifier of the first user equipment.
  • the processor is configured to configure, according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the identifier of the first user equipment, a radio bearer of the communication link with the first user equipment, and according to the identifier and the first user equipment
  • the three bearer configuration information is configured to transmit a radio bearer of data and signaling of the first user equipment on a communication link between the user equipment and the second network device.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer, where the at least one third radio bearer corresponds to The configuration of the radio link control entity and logical channel.
  • the third bearer configuration information includes: a configuration of a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer.
  • the third radio bearer is a radio bearer for transmitting data and signaling of the first user equipment on a communication link between the user equipment and the first user equipment, where the fourth radio bearer is used for the user equipment and the The communication link between the two network devices transmits the data bearer of the first user equipment and the radio bearer of the signaling.
  • the processor according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the identifier of the first user equipment And configuring a radio bearer of the communication link with the first user equipment, and configuring, according to the identifier of the first user equipment and the third bearer configuration information, for transmitting on the communication link between the user equipment and the second network device
  • a radio bearer for data and signaling of a user equipment comprising: if the fourth message includes the second indication information, enabling a first adaptation layer for processing data transmitted between the first user equipment and the second network device .
  • the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer are established. And reconfiguring or reconfiguring the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer, and the second adaptation layer that enables processing of the data transmitted by the fourth radio bearer.
  • the user equipment further includes a transmitter.
  • the transmitter is configured to: send the cell identifier of the serving cell of the user equipment and the identifier of the user equipment to the first user equipment in a discovery process with the first user equipment; or establish communication with the first user equipment Sending, in the process of the connection, the cell identifier of the serving cell of the user equipment and the identifier of the user equipment to the first user equipment; or, after establishing a communication connection with the first user equipment, the cell identifier of the serving cell of the user equipment and The identifier of the user equipment is sent to the first user equipment.
  • the user The device also includes a transmitter.
  • the processor is further configured to: obtain an identifier of the first user equipment.
  • the transmitter is configured to send a fifth message to the network device, where the fifth message carries at least one of an identifier of the user equipment and an identifier of the user equipment.
  • a network device comprising a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the receiver is configured to receive a first message sent by the first user equipment, where the first message is used to request to convert a communication path between the first user equipment and the network device from a direct connection path to a second user equipment and a second Indirect path for network device communication.
  • the first message includes a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, an identifier of the first user equipment, and a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment.
  • At least one of the communication technologies, the network device and the second network device are the same network device or different network devices.
  • the transmitter is configured to send a second message to the first user equipment, where the second message carries first indication information used to notify the first user equipment to perform communication path conversion.
  • the second message further carries the first bearer configuration information, where the first bearer configuration information includes: at least one first radio bearer and at least one second radio bearer A mapping relationship between the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment
  • the second radio bearer is a radio for a communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device Hosted.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: receive, by the receiver, the first message sent by the first user equipment And sending, to the second user equipment, a fourth message, where the fourth message carries second indication information and/or second bearer configuration information, used to notify the second user equipment to provide non-direct path support for the first user equipment, and second The bearer configuration information is used by the second user equipment to configure the radio bearer.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer And a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer, and a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer.
  • the third radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the second user equipment and the first user equipment
  • the fourth radio bearer is a radio for the communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device. Hosted.
  • the network device and the second network device are different network devices.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: before the second message is sent to the first user equipment, if the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment carried in the first message indicates that the serving cell is a cell deployed under the second network device,
  • the second network device sends a sixth message, where the sixth message is used to request to switch the first user equipment from the network device to the second network device, and the sixth message carries the information carried in the first message.
  • the receiver is further configured to: receive a seventh message sent by the second network device, where the seventh message carries the first bearer configuration information.
  • a user equipment comprising functional units for performing the method provided by the first aspect or any of the possible implementations of the first aspect.
  • a user equipment comprising any possible implementation for performing the second aspect or the second aspect The functional unit of the method provided by the method.
  • a network device comprising a functional unit for performing the method provided by the third aspect or any of the possible implementations of the third aspect.
  • a tenth aspect a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use by the user equipment, including any of the possible implementations for performing the first aspect or the first aspect, designed for the user equipment program.
  • a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use in the user equipment, including any of the possible implementations for performing the second aspect or the second aspect, designed for the user equipment program of.
  • a twelfth aspect a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use in a network device, including any of the possible implementations for performing the third aspect or the third aspect, designed for a network device program of.
  • the network device may indicate when the user equipment performs path conversion, instead of determining, by the user equipment, when the conversion is performed, the network device may perform scheduling according to the service, thereby ensuring that the user equipment is before and after the path conversion.
  • the continuity of the business may indicate when the user equipment performs path conversion, instead of determining, by the user equipment, when the conversion is performed, the network device may perform scheduling according to the service, thereby ensuring that the user equipment is before and after the path conversion.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of an access network side where a Remote UE is connected to a base station through a Relay UE;
  • 2A is a schematic diagram of a transition process between a Remote UE and a Relay UE from a direct communication mode to an indirect communication mode;
  • 2B is a schematic diagram of a transition process between a Remote UE and a Relay UE from an indirect communication mode to a direct connection communication mode;
  • FIG. 3 is a flow chart of path conversion of a Remote UE from a cellular link to a relay link in a Layer 3 Relay architecture
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a method for converting a communication path according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for converting a communication path according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a method for converting a communication path according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a method for converting a communication path according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a process for establishing a communication connection between an eRemote UE and an eRelay UE according to an embodiment of the present invention by using 3GPP technologies;
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a process for establishing a communication connection between an eRemote UE and an eRelay UE according to an embodiment of the present invention by using 3GPP technologies;
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a process for establishing a communication connection between an eRemote UE and an eRelay UE by using a non-3GPP technology according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a computer device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a first user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a second user equipment according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the techniques described herein are not limited to LTE systems, but can be used in a variety of communication systems, such as future fifth generation mobile communication systems (5G), as well as other possible communication systems.
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication systems
  • User equipment which is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, for example, may include a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the user equipment can communicate with the core network via a Radio Access Network (RAN) to exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • the user equipment may include a User Equipment (UE), a wireless terminal device, a mobile terminal device, a Subscriber Unit, a Subscriber Station, a Mobile Station, a Mobile, and a remote. Station (Remote Station), access point (Access Point, AP), Remote Terminal, Access Terminal, User Terminal, User Agent, User Device, etc.
  • a mobile phone or "cellular” phone
  • a computer with a mobile terminal device a portable, pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile device, smart wearable device, and the like.
  • PCS Personal Communication Service
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • Smart Watches smart helmets, smart glasses, smart bracelets and other equipment.
  • the user involved in the embodiment of the present invention mainly includes a first user equipment and a second user equipment, where the first user equipment is, for example, an eRemote UE, and the second user equipment is, for example, an eRelay UE.
  • the eRelay UE can provide a relay service for the eRemote UE, so that the eRemote UE communicates with the base station through the eRelay UE.
  • Both the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE can be implemented by any of the user equipments described above.
  • the eRemote UE and the eNodeB can be connected through the Uu interface.
  • the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE can be connected through the sidelink (Sidelink) technology.
  • the interface between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE is the PC5 interface.
  • the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE may also be connected through a non-3GPP (non-3GPP) access technology, such as a Bluetooth access technology, a Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN) access technology, or the like.
  • non-3GPP non-3GPP
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Networks
  • the path between the eRemote UE and the base station is called a cellular path or a direct connection path, and the link between the eRemote UE and the base station is called a cellular link or a direct connection.
  • a link or a Uu link If the eRemote UE communicates with the base station through the eRelay UE, the path between the eRemote UE and the base station is called an indirect path or a relay path, and the link between the eRemote UE and the base station is called non-straight. Connect a link or a trunk link.
  • a network device for example comprising a base station (e.g., an access point), may refer to a device in the access network that communicates over the air interface with the wireless terminal device over one or more sectors.
  • the base station can be used to convert the received air frame to the IP packet as a router between the user equipment and the rest of the access network, wherein the rest of the access network can include an IP network.
  • the base station can also coordinate attribute management of the air interface.
  • the base station may include an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in an LTE system or an evolved LTE system (LTE-A), or may also include a next generation in a 5G system
  • NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B in an LTE system or an evolved LTE system (LTE-A)
  • LTE-A evolved LTE system
  • LTE-A evolved LTE system
  • the node (next generation node B, NG-NB) is not limited in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present invention may be used interchangeably.
  • Multiple means two or more, and in view of this, "a plurality” may also be understood as “at least two” in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • and/or describing the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate that there are three cases where A exists separately, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists separately.
  • the character "/” unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
  • Connection Mode 1 The user equipment directly connects to the base station for communication. This method can be called direct connection communication.
  • Connection mode 2 A user equipment is connected to a base station by another user equipment for communication, and the method may be referred to as an indirect communication mode.
  • the former is a remote UE, and may be referred to as a remote user equipment or a remote device.
  • the terminal device used to connect the base station and the remote device is a Relay UE, and may be referred to as a relay user equipment or a relay device.
  • the uplink and downlink can be established between the base station and the relay device, and one remote device can be connected to one remote device.
  • the link between the device and the remote device may be referred to as a relay link or a side link.
  • the Remote UE can switch between two connection modes or communication paths. For example, when the quality of the link between the UE and the base station is relatively poor, the UE can be used as a Remote UE to connect to the base station through a nearby Relay UE. In this case, the direct connection communication mode and the non-direct connection communication mode are required. The conversion is to be converted from a Uu link to a relay link, see Figure 2A. Another example, when After the Relay UE connected to the Remote UE moves, the connection between the Remote UE and the Relay UE may not be maintained. In this case, the conversion from the indirect communication mode to the direct connection communication mode is required, that is, the conversion from the relay link to the Uu link, see Figure 2B.
  • the standardized Relay UE forwards data between the Remote UE and the base station through the IP layer, that is, Layer 3.
  • the following describes the Remote UE from the cellular link to the relay link in the Layer 3Relay architecture. See Figure 3 for the path conversion process.
  • the base station of the Remote UE and the base station of the Relay UE may be the same base station or different base stations, and have no effect on the solution itself.
  • FIG. 3 is an example in which the two are the same base station.
  • the Remote UE directly connects to the base station through the Uu interface, and performs data communication through direct connection communication.
  • the Remote UE determines that the channel quality of the Uu link is lower than a threshold configured by the base station, and the Remote UE triggers the path conversion process.
  • the Remote UE triggers the discovery process of the Relay UE. This process can also be regarded as a process in which the Remote UE and the Relay UE discover each other.
  • the Relay UE receiving the broadcast message may reply to the Remote UE, and then the Remote UE determines that the Relay UE is found.
  • the Relay UE actively sends a broadcast message, and if the Remote UE receives the broadcast message, it determines that the Relay UE is found.
  • the Remote UE finds one or more Relay UEs that meet the condition, the Remote UE selects one Relay UE.
  • the Remote UE starts to establish a connection with the selected Relay UE.
  • the Remote UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station, where the message is used to notify the base station that the Remote UE needs to perform with the Relay UE.
  • the base station receives the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the base station sends a radio resource control connection reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message to the remote UE, to configure, for the remote UE, a resource allocation manner used by the remote UE to communicate with the relay UE. Then the Remote UE receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration radio resource control connection reconfiguration
  • the base station If the base station configures the resource allocation mode of the UE autonomous resource selection for the remote UE, the base station carries the resource pool allocated for the Remote UE in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the Remote UE is configured according to the content in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, and thereafter, the Remote UE sends a RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the base station. Then, the base station receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message.
  • the Remote UE sends a direct communication request (DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST) message to the Relay UE in a resource pool allocated by the base station or on a resource scheduled by the base station. Then, the Relay UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message in the resource pool allocated by the base station or on the resource scheduled by the base station.
  • DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST direct communication request
  • the Relay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the Remote UE, the Relay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station to notify the base station that the Relay UE needs to communicate with the Remote UE, and requests the base station to exchange resources with the Remote UE. Then, the base station receives the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the Relay UE After the Relay UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the Remote UE, if the Relay UE is in the RRC_IDLE state, the Relay UE first enters the RRC connection through the Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection establishment process. (RRC_CONNECTED) status. Thereafter, the Relay UE sends a Sidelink UEInformation message to the base station.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to the Relay UE, to configure, for the Relay UE, a resource allocation manner used by the Relay UE to communicate with the Remote UE. Then the Relay UE receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the base station configures the resource allocation mode of the UE autonomous resource selection for the Relay UE
  • the base The resource pool allocated for the Relay UE is carried in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the Relay UE is configured according to the content in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, and then the Relay UE sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the base station. Then, the base station receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message.
  • the Relay UE sends a direct communication admission (DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT) message to the Remote UE in a resource pool allocated by the base station or on a resource scheduled by the base station. Then the Remote UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message.
  • DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT direct communication admission
  • the application layer of the Remote UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message sent by the Relay UE, the application layer of the Remote UE determines when to transfer the communication path from the Uu link to the Relay link, that is, from the direct communication path to the non-direct communication. path.
  • the eRemote UE if the eRemote UE is to perform path switching, for example, to convert from a direct path with the base station to an indirect path that communicates with the base station through the eRelay UE, it is still used by the eRemote UE.
  • the application layer itself decides when to convert data communication from the cellular link to the relay link, and cannot guarantee the continuity of the service before and after the path conversion.
  • the network device if the first user equipment requests path conversion, the network device sends a second message to the first user equipment, indicating that the first user equipment converts the communication path from the direct connection path to the non-direct connection.
  • the path that is, when the network device indicates the first user equipment to perform path conversion, instead of determining, by the first user equipment, when to perform the conversion, the network device can perform scheduling according to the service, thereby ensuring the first user equipment as much as possible.
  • the network relay mode of the Layer 2 UE-to-NW Relay is adopted.
  • the first user equipment is an eRemote UE
  • the second user equipment is an eRelay UE
  • the network equipment is a base station.
  • the actual application is not limited thereto.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication path conversion method.
  • a base station in a direct connection path and a base station in an indirect direct path are the same base station. The process of this method is described below.
  • the eRemote UE is directly connected to the base station, and performs data communication with the base station through the direct connection path.
  • the eRemote UE triggers the discovery of the eRelay UE.
  • the trigger condition is configured by the base station or triggered by the eRemote UE.
  • the eRemote UE enters a discovery process of the eRelay UE, and discovers surrounding eRelay UEs by using the discovery process.
  • the eRemote UE After the eRemote UE discovers one or more eRelay UEs that meet the condition, the eRemote UE selects an eRelay UE from the eRelay UEs that meet the condition.
  • the eRemote UE After the eRemote UE selects an eRelay UE, the eRemote UE establishes a communication connection with the eRelay UE, where the communication connection is a short-distance link connection between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE.
  • the short-distance link connection technology between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE includes, but is not limited to, LTE Sidelink technology, WLAN technology or Bluetooth technology.
  • the eRemote UE When the short-distance link connection technology between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE is the LTE Sidelink technology, the eRemote UE first requests resources from the base station before establishing a communication connection with the eRelay UE, and after obtaining the resources allocated by the base station, the eRemote UE Then establish a communication connection with the eRelay UE.
  • the short-distance link connection technology between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE is the LTE Sidelink technology
  • the eRelay UE first enters the RRC_CONNECTED state through the RRC connection establishment procedure, and then establishes a communication connection with the eRemote UE.
  • S401-S404 are optional steps. In order to distinguish from the required steps, these steps are drawn as dashed lines in FIG.
  • the eRemote UE After successfully establishing a communication connection with the selected eRelay UE, the eRemote UE sends a first message to the base station, where the first message is used to request a communication path transition from the base station, that is, requesting a communication path between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the direct connection path is converted to an indirect path that communicates with the base station through the eRelay UE.
  • the base station receives the first message.
  • the base station before the path switching, that is, the base station in the direct connection path, and the base station after the path conversion, that is, the base station in the indirect path may be the same base station, or may be different.
  • the two base stations are taken as an example.
  • the first message is, for example, an RRC message, and the RRC message carries at least one of the following information:
  • Path conversion type path conversion from a cellular path to a relay path
  • the eRemote UE selects and establishes an identifier of the eRelay UE of the communication connection;
  • the eRemote UE selects and establishes a cell identifier of a serving cell of the eRelay UE of the communication connection;
  • Short-range communication technology between eRemote UE and eRelay UE for example, LTE Sidelink, or Bluetooth, or WLAN, and the like.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, where the fourth message carries the third bearer configuration information and the identifier of the eRemote UE.
  • the fourth message further carries the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the second indication
  • the information is used to notify the eRelay UE to provide the indirect path support for the eRemote UE, and the second bearer configuration information and the third bearer configuration information are used by the eRelay UE to configure the radio bearer.
  • the eRelay UE receives the fourth message.
  • the fourth message is, for example, an RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the radio bearer configured to carry the control signaling and user plane data of the eRemote UE is configured for the eRelay UE by using the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer, and a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer.
  • the third bearer configuration information includes: a configuration of a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer.
  • the mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer is included in the second bearer configuration information, or the mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer may also be used. It is included in the third bearer configuration information, not included in the second bearer configuration information.
  • the third radio bearer is a radio bearer for transmitting data and signaling of the eRemote UE on a communication link between the eRelay UE and the eRemote UE, and the fourth radio bearer is used for transmitting a communication link between the eRelay UE and the base station.
  • eRemote UE radio bearer for data and signaling.
  • the base station After receiving the first message, the base station determines, according to the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE that is included in the first message, whether the serving cell of the eRelay UE belongs to the local base station or another neighboring base station. In this embodiment, the eRelay UE is used.
  • the serving cell is an example of a cell belonging to the base station.
  • the base station determines, according to the identifier of the eRelay UE included in the first message, which UE the eRelay UE connected to the eRemote UE is. If the base station allows the eRemote UE to perform communication path switching, the base station sends the RRC connection reconfiguration message to the eRelay UE.
  • the eRelay UE configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the fourth message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, the eRelay UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station, and the base station receives the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the eRelay UE configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the eRemote UE according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the identifier of the eRemote UE, and configures according to the identifier of the eRemote UE and the third bearer configuration information.
  • the eRelay UE enables an adaptation layer for processing data transmitted between the eRemote UE and the base station, for example, it is referred to as a first adaptation layer. If the fourth message includes the second bearer configuration information, the eRelay UE establishes a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer.
  • the eRelay UE re-establishes the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer according to the third bearer configuration information carried in the fourth message, and the adaptation layer that enables the data to be processed by the fourth radio bearer to be processed, For example, it is referred to as a second adaptation layer.
  • the eRelay UE reconfigures the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer according to the third bearer configuration information carried in the fourth message, and the second adaptation layer that enables the data to be processed by the fourth radio bearer to be processed. .
  • the base station sends a second message to the eRemote UE, where the second message carries at least one of the first indication information and the first bearer configuration information used to notify the eRemote UE to perform the communication path conversion.
  • the second indication information is used to notify the eRemote UE to perform communication path conversion, where the first bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of a link between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE, and/or PDCP between the eRemote UE and the base station. Layer configuration information.
  • the first bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one first radio bearer and the at least one second radio bearer, and a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE
  • the second radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the eRemote UE configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the second message.
  • the eRelay UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station, and the base station receives the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, and the eRemote UE stops.
  • Data transmission through the direct connection path with the base station that is, disconnecting the direct connection path with the base station.
  • the eRemote UE starts data transmission between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the eRemote UE enables an adaptation layer for processing data transmitted between the eRelay UE and the base station, for example, referred to as a third adaptation layer. And if the second message includes the first bearer configuration information, the eRemote UE reconfigures the radio link control entity and the logical channel of the first radio bearer according to the first bearer configuration information.
  • the order of execution between S406-S409 may be arbitrary, and is not limited by the order given in FIG.
  • the first message may carry the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE. Then, if the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE are connected by the 3GPP technology, the eRemote UE obtains the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE. , including but not limited to the following methods:
  • the eRemote UE acquires the cell identity of the serving cell of the eRelay UE in the process of establishing a communication connection with the eRelay UE. details as follows:
  • the eRemote UE carries the indication information for requesting the eRelay UE to send the cell identity of its serving cell in the connection establishment request message sent to the eRelay UE. Then, after receiving the connection establishment request message of the eRemote UE, the eRelay UE carries the cell identity of its own serving cell in the connection request admission message replied to the eRemote UE.
  • the cell identifier of the serving cell may be directly included in the connection admission request message, or may be used as a MAC in a Media Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU) carrying the connection admission request message. Control element (CE) to transfer.
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • PDU Protocol Data Unit
  • the eRelay UE actively sends the cell identity information of its own serving cell. details as follows:
  • the eRelay UE actively includes the cell identity of the serving cell in which it is located in the connection request admission message replied to the eRemote UE.
  • the cell identifier of the serving cell may be directly included in the connection admission request message, or may be transmitted as a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carrying the connection admission request message.
  • the eRemote UE obtains the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE, including but not limited to the following methods:
  • the eRemote UE sends a request message to the eRelay UE.
  • the request message is used to request the eRelay UE to provide Layer 2 UE-to-NW Relay support, or to request the eRelay UE to forward the service data with the base station through Layer 2.
  • the eRelay UE agrees to the request for the request message
  • the eRelay UE replies to the eRemote UE with an accept request message to notify the eRemote UE that the eRelay UE has accepted the request of the eRemote UE, and includes the cell of the serving cell of the eRelay UE in the admission request message.
  • the request message sent by the eRemote UE and the admission request message replied by the eRelay UE may be an RRC message. If the eRelay UE is in the RRC_IDLE state when receiving the request message sent by the eRemote UE, the eRelay UE first establishes an RRC connection, transfers to the RRC_CONNECTED state, and then returns an admission request message to the eRemote UE.
  • the cell identifier may include a physical cell identity (PCI) of the cell, or include a cell identifier (Cell that can uniquely identify the cell in a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). Identity), or includes the cell global identity (CGI).
  • PCI physical cell identity
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • CGI cell global identity
  • the base station may reject the path conversion request of the eRemote UE. That If the eRemote UE has previously established a communication connection with the eRelay UE, if the base station rejects the path redirection request of the eRemote UE, the eRemote UE needs to know the decision of the base station in order to release the communication connection with the eRelay UE in time.
  • the method when the base station rejects the path conversion request of the eRemote UE, includes, but is not limited to, releasing the communication connection between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE by using the following solutions:
  • the base station If the base station rejects the eRemote UE for communication path conversion, the base station sends an RRC message to the eRemote UE, where the RRC message includes indication information that rejects the eRemote UE for path conversion. Then, the eRemote UE knows that the base station rejects the path switching request according to the indication information carried in the RRC message, so that the eRemote UE can trigger the release process of the communication connection with the eRelay UE.
  • the base station configures the eRemote UE for a duration.
  • a timer is started, and the timer duration of the timer is the duration configured by the base station.
  • the timer run if the eRemote UE receives the second message, it stops running the timer.
  • the timer expires, if the eRemote UE has not received the second message, the eRemote UE determines that the base station rejects the path switch request, and the eRemote UE triggers the release process of the communication connection with the eRelay UE.
  • the eRemote UE After the eRemote UE sends the first message to the base station, it starts a timer.
  • the time duration of the timer is determined by the eRemote UE. For example, the eRemote UE can be determined according to experience.
  • the timer run if the eRemote UE receives the second message, it stops running the timer.
  • the timer expires, if the eRemote UE has not received the second message, the eRemote UE determines that the base station rejects the path switch request, and the eRemote UE triggers the release process of the communication connection with the eRelay UE.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication path conversion method.
  • a base station in a direct connection path and a base station in an indirect direct path are different base stations. The process of this method is described below.
  • the eRemote UE is directly connected to the base station, and performs data communication with the base station through the direct connection path.
  • the first base station in S501-S505 is the base station in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the first base station sends a sixth message to the second base station, where the sixth message is used to request to switch the eRemote UE from the first base station to the second base station, where the sixth message includes all the information carried in the first message.
  • the sixth message is, for example, a handover request message. Then the second base station receives the sixth message.
  • the base station After receiving the first message, the base station determines, according to the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE that is included in the first message, whether the serving cell of the eRelay UE belongs to the local base station or another neighboring base station.
  • the eRelay UE is used.
  • the serving cell is an example of a cell belonging to another base station, and the other base station is referred to as a second base station, and the base station is referred to as a first base station.
  • the first base station sends a sixth message to the serving base station of the eRelay UE, that is, the second base station.
  • the sixth message includes all information carried by the eRemote UE in the first message.
  • the first base station may also notify the second base station in the sixth message that the reason for the current handover is that the eRemote UE needs to perform communication path conversion from the direct communication path to the indirect communication path.
  • the second base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, where the fourth message carries the third bearer configuration information and the identifier of the eRemote UE, and the fourth message further carries the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information.
  • the second indication information is used to notify the eRelay UE to provide the indirect path support for the eRemote UE, and the second bearer configuration information and the third bearer configuration information are used by the eRelay UE to configure the radio bearer.
  • the eRelay UE receives the fourth message.
  • the fourth message is, for example, an RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the radio bearer configured to carry the control signaling and user plane data of the eRemote UE is configured for the eRelay UE by using the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer, and a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer.
  • the third bearer configuration information includes: at least one fourth The radio bearers the configuration of the corresponding radio link control entity and logical channel.
  • the mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer is included in the second bearer configuration information, or the mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer may also be used. It is included in the third bearer configuration information, not included in the second bearer configuration information.
  • the third radio bearer is a radio bearer for transmitting data and signaling of the eRemote UE on a communication link between the eRelay UE and the eRemote UE, and the fourth radio bearer is used for transmitting a communication link between the eRelay UE and the base station.
  • eRemote UE radio bearer for data and signaling.
  • the second base station After receiving the handover request message sent by the first base station, the second base station determines, according to the identifier of the eRelay UE carried in the handover request message, which UE the eRelay UE connected to the eRemote UE is. If the second base station allows the eRemote UE to perform communication path switching and performs indirect communication with the second base station by using the eRelay UE, the second base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, and configured to use the fourth message for the eRelay UE. A radio bearer carrying control signaling and user plane data of the eRemote UE. The fourth message is, for example, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRelay UE configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the fourth message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, the eRelay UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, and the second base station receives the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the eRelay UE configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the eRemote UE according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the identifier of the eRemote UE, and configures according to the identifier of the eRemote UE and the third bearer configuration information.
  • the second base station After receiving the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message returned by the eRelay UE, the second base station sends a seventh message to the first base station. Then the first base station receives the seventh message.
  • the seventh message carries the first bearer configuration information, that is, the radio bearer configuration information carrying the link between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE, and/or the configuration information of the PDCP layer between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the seventh message is, for example, a handover confirmation message.
  • S506 and S509 are optional steps. In order to distinguish from the required steps, the two steps are drawn as dashed lines in FIG. 5.
  • the first base station After receiving the seventh message sent by the second base station, the first base station sends a second message to the eRemote UE, where the second message is used to notify the eRemote UE to perform communication path conversion.
  • the information carried in the seventh message is included in the second message.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRemote UE After receiving the second message, the eRemote UE configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the second message. After completing the RRC connection reconfiguration, the eRelay UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, and the second base station receives the RRC. The reconfiguration complete message is connected, and the eRemote UE stops the data transmission through the direct connection path with the first base station, that is, disconnects the direct connection path with the base station. After that, the eRemote UE starts data transmission between the eRelay UE and the second base station.
  • the eRemote UE If the second message includes the first indication information, the eRemote UE enables a third adaptation layer for processing data transmitted between the eRelay UE and the base station. And if the second message includes the first bearer configuration information, the eRemote UE reconfigures the radio link control entity and the logical channel of the first radio bearer according to the first bearer configuration information.
  • the content included in the first bearer configuration information reference may be made to the description of S408 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and details are not described herein.
  • the execution order between S506-S511 may be arbitrary, and is not limited by the order given in FIG. 5.
  • the base station may reject the path conversion request of the eRemote UE, and the eRemote UE needs to know the decision of the base station to release the communication connection with the eRelay UE in time.
  • the eRemote UE knows the decision of the base station to release the communication connection with the eRelay UE, refer to the related description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and no further details are provided.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication path conversion method.
  • the eRemote UE sends a first message to the base station after establishing a communication connection with the eRelay UE.
  • the eRemote UE is the first direction.
  • the base station sends the first message, and then establishes a communication connection with the eRelay UE.
  • the base station in the direct connection path and the base station in the indirect direct path are the same base station. The process of this method is described below.
  • the eRemote UE is directly connected to the base station, and performs data communication with the base station through the direct connection path.
  • the eRemote UE After selecting an eRelay UE, the eRemote UE sends a first message to the base station, where the first message is used to request a communication path transition from the base station, that is, requesting to convert the communication path between the eRemote UE and the base station from the direct connection path to An indirect path that communicates with the base station through the eRelay UE.
  • the first message is, for example, an RRC message, and the information carried in the RRC message can be referred to the description in S405 in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the eRemote UE may not be able to obtain the identifier of the eRelay UE through the communication connection with the eRelay UE, because the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE have not established a communication connection in the embodiment of the present invention. Then, if the eRemote UE does not know the identifier of the eRelay UE in advance, the identifier of the eRelay UE cannot be carried in the first message. If the identifier of the eRelay UE is known in advance by the eRemote UE, the identifier of the eRelay UE may be selected in the first message. .
  • the base station sends a second message to the eRemote UE, where the second message carries at least one of first indication information and first bearer configuration information used to notify the eRemote UE to perform communication path conversion, where the second indication information is used to notify eRemote
  • the UE performs communication path conversion, and the first bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of a link between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE, and/or configuration information of a PDCP layer between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the eRemote UE receives the second message, and the second message is, for example, an RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the base station After receiving the first message, the base station determines, according to the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE that is included in the first message, whether the serving cell of the eRelay UE belongs to the local base station or another neighboring base station. In this embodiment, the eRelay UE is used.
  • the serving cell is an example of a cell belonging to the base station. Then, if the base station allows the eRemote UE to perform communication path switching, the base station sends a second message to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRemote UE After receiving the second message, the eRemote UE first establishes a communication connection with the selected eRelay UE. In addition, the eRemote UE also configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the second message.
  • the eRelay UE sends an RRC message to the base station, where the RRC message is used to notify the base station, where the eRelay UE can serve as the relay UE of the eRemote UE. Then the base station receives the RRC message.
  • the eRelay UE If the eRelay UE is in the RRC_IDLE state when establishing a communication connection with the eRemote UE, the eRelay UE first initiates an RRC connection establishment process and transits to the RRC_CONNCTED state. In the RRC_CONNCTED state, the eRelay UE sends an RRC message to the base station. Of course, if the eRelay UE is already in the RRC_CONNCTED state when establishing a communication connection with the eRemote UE, the eRelay UE may directly send an RRC message to the base station.
  • the RRC message includes at least one of the following information:
  • the eRelay UE may be used as an identifier of the eRemote UE of the relay UE;
  • Short-range communication technology between eRemote UE and eRelay UE for example, LTE Sidelink, or Bluetooth, or WLAN, and the like.
  • the base station After receiving the RRC message, the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, where the fourth message carries the third bearer configuration information and the identifier of the eRemote UE, and the fourth message further carries the second indication information and/or the second bearer.
  • the configuration information, the second indication information is used to notify the eRelay UE to provide the indirect path support for the eRemote UE, and the second bearer configuration information and the third bearer configuration information are used by the eRelay UE to configure the radio bearer.
  • the eRelay UE receives the fourth message.
  • the fourth message is, for example, an RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the radio bearer configured to carry the control signaling and user plane data of the eRemote UE is configured for the eRelay UE by using the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the eRelay UE configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the fourth message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, the eRelay UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station, and the base station receives the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the eRelay UE sends a ninth message to the eRemote UE, where the ninth message is used to notify the eRemote UE, and the eRelay UE can start forwarding the service data between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the ninth message may be a message in the process of establishing a communication connection between the eRemote UE and the selected eRelay UE in S606, or may be a single message.
  • S606, S607, and S610 are optional steps. In order to distinguish from the required steps, these steps are drawn as dashed lines in FIG. 6.
  • the eRemote UE After confirming that the eRelay UE can forward the service data with the base station, the eRemote UE stops the data transmission through the direct connection path with the base station, that is, disconnects the direct connection path with the base station. And, the eRemote UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station by using the eRelay UE. After that, the eRemote UE starts data transmission between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the first message may carry the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE. Then, if the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE perform the communication connection through the 3GPP technology, the eRemote UE obtains the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE, Including but not limited to the following methods:
  • the eRelay UE includes the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE in the transmitted Master Information Block (MIB) message for the Sidelink.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • the eRelay UE includes the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE in the discovery message sent to the eRemote UE.
  • the discovery message may be a discovery announcement message or a discovery response message.
  • the manner in which the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE are connected by using the non-3GPP technology the manner in which the eRemote UE obtains the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE may be referred to the description in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides the following solutions:
  • the eRemote UE After receiving the second message sent by the base station, the eRemote UE applies the radio bearer configuration of the link with the eRelay until the connection is established with the eRelay UE.
  • the eRemote UE After receiving the second message, the eRemote UE immediately applies the radio bearer configuration of the link with the eRelay. After the eRemote UE determines that the communication connection with the eRelay UE fails to be established, the eRemote UE releases the radio bearer configuration.
  • the eRemote UE is disconnected from the base station in S611.
  • the eRemote UE may disconnect the direct connection path with the base station after receiving the second message.
  • the eRemote UE may elect to trigger the RRC connection re-establishment procedure. Specifically, after the eRemote UE receives the connection establishment reject message of the eRelay UE, the eRemote UE triggers the RRC connection reestablishment process.
  • the eRemote UE when the eRemote UE sends the connection establishment request message to the eRelay UE and does not receive the response message of the eRelay UE after the preset duration, the eRemote UE triggers the RRC connection reestablishment process.
  • the preset duration may be configured by the base station in advance, or may be set by the eRemote UE according to experience.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication path conversion method.
  • the eRemote UE first sends a first message to the base station, and then establishes a communication connection with the eRelay UE.
  • the base station in the direct connection path and the base station in the indirect direct path are different base stations. The process of this method is described below.
  • the eRemote UE is directly connected to the base station, and performs data communication with the base station through the direct connection path.
  • S701-S704 in the embodiment of the present invention reference may be made to S601-S604 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and the same steps are not described in detail. The steps different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 are mainly introduced below.
  • the first base station sends a sixth message to the second base station, where the sixth message is used to request to switch the eRemote UE from the first base station to the second base station, where the sixth message includes all the information carried in the first message.
  • the sixth message is, for example, a handover request message. Then the second base station receives the sixth message.
  • the first base station After receiving the first message, the first base station determines, according to the cell identifier of the serving cell of the eRelay UE that is included in the first message, whether the serving cell of the eRelay UE belongs to the local base station or another neighboring base station, in the embodiment of the present invention,
  • the serving cell of the eRelay UE is an example of a cell belonging to another base station, and the other base station is referred to as a second base station, and the base station is referred to as a first base station.
  • the first base station sends a sixth message to the serving base station of the eRelay UE, that is, the second base station.
  • the sixth message includes all information carried by the eRemote UE in the first message.
  • the first base station may also notify the second base station in the sixth message that the reason for the current handover is that the eRemote UE needs to perform communication path conversion from the direct communication path to the indirect communication path.
  • the second base station sends a seventh message to the first base station, where the first base station receives the seventh message.
  • the seventh message carries the first bearer configuration information, that is, the radio bearer configuration information carrying the link between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE, and/or the configuration information of the PDCP layer between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the seventh message is, for example, a handover confirmation message.
  • the seventh message carries the information included in the sixth message.
  • the second base station After the second base station receives the sixth message, if the second base station allows the eRemote UE to perform the communication path conversion and performs the indirect direct communication with the second base station by using the eRelay UE, the second base station sends the seventh message to the first base station.
  • the first base station After receiving the seventh message, the first base station sends a second message to the eRemote UE, where the second message is used to notify the eRemote UE to perform communication path conversion.
  • the information carried in the seventh message is included in the second message.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRemote UE After receiving the second message, the eRemote UE establishes a communication connection with the eRelay UE selected by the eRemote UE. In addition, the eRemote UE also configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the second message.
  • the eRelay UE sends an RRC message to the second base station, where the RRC message is used to notify the second base station, where the eRelay UE can serve as the relay UE of the eRemote UE. Then the second base station receives the RRC message.
  • the eRelay UE If the eRelay UE is in the RRC_IDLE state when establishing a communication connection with the eRemote UE, the eRelay UE first initiates an RRC connection establishment process and transits to the RRC_CONNCTED state. In the RRC_CONNCTED state, the eRelay UE sends an RRC message to the second base station. Of course, if the eRelay UE is already in the RRC_CONNCTED state when establishing a communication connection with the eRemote UE, the eRelay UE may directly send an RRC message to the second base station.
  • the RRC message includes at least one of the following information:
  • the eRelay UE may be used as an identifier of the eRemote UE of the relay UE;
  • Short-range communication technology between eRemote UE and eRelay UE for example, LTE Sidelink, or Bluetooth, or WLAN, and the like.
  • S710 After receiving the RRC message, the second base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE. Regarding the content and the like carried by the fourth message, reference may be made to the related description of S406 in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the eRelay UE configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the fourth message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, the eRelay UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, and the second base station receives the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the eRelay UE sends a ninth message to the eRemote UE, where the ninth message is used to notify the eRemote UE, and the eRelay UE can start forwarding the service data between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the ninth message may be a message in the process of establishing a communication connection between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE selected by the eRemote UE in S708, or may be a single message.
  • S705, S706, S708, S709, and S712 are all optional steps. In order to distinguish from the required steps, these steps are drawn as dashed lines in FIG.
  • the eRemote UE stops the first base station after confirming that the eRelay UE can forward the service data with the second base station.
  • the data transmission through the direct connection path that is, the direct connection path with the first base station is disconnected.
  • the eRemote UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station by using the eRelay UE. After that, the eRemote UE starts data transmission between the eRelay UE and the second base station.
  • the eRemote UE is disconnected from the base station in S713.
  • the eRemote UE may disconnect the direct connection path with the first base station after receiving the second message.
  • the eRemote UE may also choose to trigger the RRC connection re-establishment process. For the introduction of this part, refer to FIG. The illustrated embodiment.
  • the eRemote UE may be considered to be connected to the second base station by using the eRelay UE, and as an alternative implementation manner of the embodiment, the eRemote UE may first access the second The base station is then converted to an indirect communication path. That is, as will be introduced before
  • S714-S718 is an alternative implementation, which is not shown in FIG. 7.
  • the second base station sends a seventh message to the first base station, where the first base station receives the seventh message.
  • the seventh message is a handover confirmation message carrying a handover command.
  • the second base station After the second base station receives the sixth message, if the second base station allows the eRemote UE to perform the communication path conversion and performs the indirect direct communication with the second base station by using the eRelay UE, the second base station sends the seventh message to the first base station.
  • the first base station After receiving the seventh message, the first base station sends an eighth message to the eRemote UE, where the eighth message is used to notify the eRemote UE to perform the handover.
  • the eighth message includes a handover command carried by the seventh message.
  • the eighth message is, for example, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRemote UE performs a normal handover process. That is, the eRemote UE completes the handover to the second base station through the random access procedure.
  • the eRemote UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, where the second base station receives the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the second base station After receiving the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, the second base station sends a second message to the eRemote UE.
  • the second message is used to notify the eRemote UE to perform communication path conversion.
  • the second message includes the first bearer configuration information, that is, the radio bearer configuration information carrying the link between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE, and/or the configuration information of the PDCP layer between the eRemote UE and the base station.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • an embodiment of the present invention describes a process of establishing a communication connection between an eRemote UE and an eRelay UE.
  • the communication connection in the embodiment of the present invention is a communication connection under the 3GPP technology, for example, a sidelink connection.
  • the eRemote UE directly connects to the base station through the Uu interface, and performs data communication through direct connection communication.
  • the eRemote UE determines that the channel quality of the Uu link is lower than the threshold configured by the base station.
  • This process can also be seen as a process in which the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE discover each other. For example, if the eRemote UE sends a broadcast message, the eRelay UE receiving the broadcast message may reply to the eRemote UE, and the eRemote UE determines that the eRelay UE is found. Alternatively, the eRelay UE actively sends a broadcast message, and if the eRemote UE receives the broadcast message, it determines that the eRelay UE is found.
  • the eRemote UE If the eRemote UE discovers one or more eRelay UEs that satisfy the condition, the eRemote UE selects one eRelay UE therefrom.
  • the above is the selection process of the eRelay UE shown in FIG. The following describes the process after the end of the eRelay UE selection.
  • the eRemote UE starts to establish a communication connection with the selected Relay UE.
  • the eRemote UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station, where the message is used to notify the base station that the eRemote UE needs to communicate with the eRelay UE, and requests the eRelay from the base station.
  • the base station receives the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message carries at least one of the following two indications:
  • the eRemote UE requests a resource for communicating with the eRelay UE through the Layer 2 Relay UE mode;
  • the application scenario of the resource requested by the eRemote UE for example, communication for a commercial (Commerical) application or communication for a public safety (Public Safety) application.
  • the application scenario may be different, and the base station may allocate different resources to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to the eRemote UE, to configure, by the eRemote UE, a resource allocation manner used by the eRemote UE to communicate with the eRelay UE. Then the eRemote UE receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the base station If the base station configures the resource allocation mode of the UE autonomous resource selection for the eRemote UE, the base station carries the resource pool allocated for the eRemote UE in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRemote UE is configured according to the content in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, and thereafter, the eRemote UE sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the base station. Then, the base station receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message.
  • the eRemote UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE in a resource pool allocated by the base station or on a resource scheduled by the base station. Then, the eRelay UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message in the resource pool allocated by the base station.
  • the S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station to notify the base station that the eRelay UE needs to communicate with the eRemote UE, and request the base station to exchange resources with the eRemote UE. Then, the base station receives the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message carries at least one of the following two indications:
  • the eRelay UE requests a resource for communicating with the eRemote UE through the Layer 2 Relay UE mode;
  • the application scenario of the resource requested by the eRelay UE for example, communication for the Commerical application or communication for the Public Safety application.
  • the eRelay UE After the eRelay UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, if the eRelay UE is in the RRC_IDLE state, the eRelay UE first enters the RRC_CONNECTED state through the RRC connection establishment process. Thereafter, the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UEInformation message to the base station.
  • the base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to the eRelay UE to configure the resource allocation mode used by the eRelay UE to communicate with the eRemote UE. Then the eRelay UE receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the base station If the base station configures the resource allocation mode of the UE autonomous resource selection for the eRelay UE, the base station carries the resource pool allocated for the eRelay UE in the eRRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRelay UE is configured according to the content in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, and the eRelay UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message to the eRemote UE in the resource pool allocated by the base station or on the resource scheduled by the base station. Then the eRemote UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message.
  • the eRemote UE After the S808 and the eRemote UE receive the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message sent by the eRelay UE, the eRemote UE sends the first message to the base station.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, where the fourth message carries the third bearer configuration information and the identifier of the eRemote UE.
  • the fourth message further carries the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the eRelay UE receives the fourth message.
  • the base station of the eRemote UE and the base station of the eRemote UE are not the same base station, the base station of the eRemote UE includes the information carried in the first message sent by the eRemote UE in the S808 in the sixth message sent by the eRemote UE.
  • the base station since the data is forwarded by the Adaptation layer and does not pass through the IP layer, the base station cannot determine the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE by using the IP address. Therefore, after the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE establish a Sidelink connection, the base station The mapping between the identifier of the eRemote UE and the identifier of the eRelay UE needs to be obtained and saved, so that the base station can configure the radio bearer for the corresponding eRemote UE and the eRelay UE, and when the base station needs to send the downlink data to the eRemote UE or the eRelay UE, according to the base station, The identity can determine the eRemote UE or eRelay UE.
  • the base station acquires the identifier of the eRemote UE and the identifier of the eRelay UE according to the connection establishment process of the Sidelink between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE shown in FIG. 8, including but not limited to the following implementation manners:
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S805 and the eRelay UE allocate an identifier for the eRemote UE that can uniquely identify the eRemote UE under the eRelay UE, and the identifier is called a first identifier, or is called an eRemote UE. Local ID (Local ID).
  • the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station, where the Layer-2 UE information message carries the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE.
  • the base station obtains the identifier of the eRemote UE, that is, the Local ID.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send a first message to the base station, where the first message includes a Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE that establishes a Sidelink connection with the eRemote UE. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the base station can associate the identifier of the eRelay UE with the identifier of the eRemote UE by using the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE and the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE are used for communication between the eRelay UE and the eRemote UE, and the base station may not need to be known.
  • the embodiment of the present invention only uses the Layer-2 ID to associate the identifier of the eRelay UE with the identifier of the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRemote UE that is, the Local ID, which is learned by the base station, is allocated by the eRelay UE, and is relative to the Cell Radio Network Temmporation Identify (C-RNTI) of the eRemote UE.
  • the ID has a small length and is convenient to carry in the message, which helps reduce overhead.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE and the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Direct_Connection_request message to the eRelay UE are included.
  • the base station After the refined S806 receives the Sidelink UE Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE to configure the resource allocation mode used by the eRelay UE to communicate with the eRemote UE. Then the eRelay UE receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes a correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE that the eRemote UE establishes the Sidelink connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE and the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE are included.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE that the eRemote UE establishes the Sidelink connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S809 after receiving the first message, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, for example, an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message.
  • the eRelay UE receives the fourth message.
  • the identifier of the eRemote UE obtained by the base station is the local ID of the eRemote UE, and the base station can uniquely determine an eRemote UE according to the identifier of the eRelay UE and the local ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S805 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the corresponding information of the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE that send the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included in the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the refined S807 and the eRelay UE send a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message to the eRemote UE, where the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message carries the identifier of the eRelay UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE is, for example, the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carrying the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE that establishes a Sidelink connection with the eRemote UE is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the base station After the refined S806 receives the Sidelink UE Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE. In the RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE is simultaneously notified to the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carrying the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE that establishes a Sidelink connection with the eRemote UE is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE After the refined S805 and the eRelay UE receive the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the refined S807 and eRelay UE send eRelay at the same time when sending the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message to the eRemote UE.
  • the identity of the UE is notified to the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carrying the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE that establishes a Sidelink connection with the eRemote UE is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S809 after receiving the first message sent by the eRemote UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the fourth message the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the identifier of the eRemote UE obtained by the base station is the local ID of the eRemote UE, and the base station can uniquely determine an eRemote UE according to the identifier of the eRelay UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE obtained by the base station is the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the refined S804 the eRemote UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE, and the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE is also sent together with the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted by using a MAC CE in the MAC PDU of the downlink of the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S805 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the C-RNT of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the correspondence between the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE may also be included.
  • the refined S804 the eRemote UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE, and the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE is also sent together with the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted by using a MAC CE in the MAC PDU of the downlink of the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message further includes a Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE.
  • the base station After the refined S806 receives the Sidelink UE Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE. In the RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S804 the eRemote UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE, and the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE is also sent together with the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted by using a MAC CE in the MAC PDU of the downlink of the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message further includes a Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE.
  • the refined S809 after receiving the first message sent by the eRemote UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • Base station Send a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S805 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the corresponding information of the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE that send the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included in the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the base station After the refined S806 receives the Sidelink UE Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE. In the RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S805 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the refined S808 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S809 after receiving the first message sent by the eRemote UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the fourth message the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • an embodiment of the present invention describes a process of establishing a communication connection between an eRemote UE and an eRelay UE.
  • the communication connection in the embodiment of the present invention is a communication connection under the 3GPP technology, for example, a sidelink connection.
  • the eRemote UE directly connects to the base station through the Uu interface, and performs data communication through direct connection communication.
  • the eRemote UE determines that the channel quality of the Uu link is lower than the threshold configured by the base station.
  • This process can also be seen as a process in which the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE discover each other. For example, if the eRemote UE sends a broadcast message, the eRelay UE receiving the broadcast message may reply to the eRemote UE, and the eRemote UE determines that the eRelay UE is found. Alternatively, the eRelay UE actively sends a broadcast message, and if the eRemote UE receives the broadcast message, it determines that the eRelay UE is found.
  • the eRemote UE If the eRemote UE discovers one or more eRelay UEs that satisfy the condition, the eRemote UE selects one eRelay UE therefrom.
  • the above is the selection process of the eRelay UE shown in FIG. The following describes the process after the end of the eRelay UE selection.
  • the eRemote UE sends the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the base station receives the first message.
  • the first message carries at least one of the following two indication information:
  • the eRemote UE requests a resource for communicating with the eRelay UE through the Layer 2 Relay UE mode;
  • the application scenario of the resource requested by the eRemote UE for example, communication for the Commerical application or communication for the Public Safety application.
  • the base station sends a second message to the eRemote UE, and the eRemote UE receives the second message.
  • the second message is, for example, RRC. Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the eRemote UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE in a resource pool allocated by the base station or on a resource scheduled by the base station. Then, the eRelay UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message in the resource pool allocated by the base station.
  • the UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station to notify the base station that the eRelay UE needs to communicate with the eRemote UE, and requests the base station to exchange resources with the eRemote UE. Then, the base station receives the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message carries at least one of the following two indications:
  • the eRelay UE requests a resource for communicating with the eRemote UE through the Layer 2 Relay UE mode;
  • the application scenario of the resource requested by the eRelay UE for example, communication for the Commerical application or communication for the Public Safety application.
  • the eRelay UE After the eRelay UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, if the eRelay UE is in the RRC_IDLE state, the eRelay UE first enters the RRC_CONNECTED state through the RRC connection establishment process. Thereafter, the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, to configure, by the eRelay UE, a resource allocation manner used by the eRelay UE to communicate with the eRemote UE. Then the eRelay UE receives the fourth message.
  • the fourth message is an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRelay UE is configured according to the content in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, and the eRelay UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message to the eRemote UE in the resource pool allocated by the base station or on the resource scheduled by the base station. Then the eRemote UE receives the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT message.
  • the eRemote UE maintains data transmission with the base station over the direct communication link.
  • the eRemote UE performs configuration according to the content in the second message. After the configuration is complete, the eRemote UE sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the base station by using the eRelay UE. Then, the base station receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message.
  • the eRemote UE transmits data to the base station through the eRelay UE.
  • the base station of the eRelay UE and the base station of the eRemote UE are not the same base station, the base station of the eRemote UE includes the information carried in the first message sent by the eRemote UE in S901 in the sixth message sent by the eRelay UE.
  • the base station needs to acquire and save the correspondence between the identifier of the eRemote UE and the identifier of the eRelay UE.
  • the base station acquires the identifier of the eRemote UE and the identifier of the eRelay UE according to the connection establishment process of the Sidelink between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE shown in FIG. 9, including but not limited to the following implementation manners:
  • the refined S901 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S904 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S904 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the corresponding information of the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE that send the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included in the Sidelink UE Information message.
  • the refined S901 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S904 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S904 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the refined S905 after receiving the Sidelink UE Information sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S903, eRemote UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE. Also transmitted with the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message is the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carried by the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message.
  • the refined S904 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S904 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message may further include a correspondence between the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S903, eRemote UE sends a DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE. Also transmitted with the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message is the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carried by the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message.
  • the refined S904 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S904 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE may also be included.
  • the base station After the refined S905 receives the Sidelink UE information sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE. In the fourth message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S901 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE is included.
  • the refined S904 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S904 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE is included.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message may further include a correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE that send the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE.
  • the refined S901 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE is included.
  • the refined S904 and the eRelay UE After receiving the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S904 and the eRelay UE send a Sidelink UE Information message to the base station.
  • the Sidelink UE Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE is included.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST message to the eRelay UE may also be included.
  • the base station After the refined S905 receives the Sidelink UE information sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates one to the eRemote UE. Local ID. The base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE. In the fourth message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • an embodiment of the present invention describes a process of establishing a communication connection between the eRemote UE and the eRelay UE.
  • the communication connection in the embodiment of the present invention is non.
  • a short-range communication connection is established between the S1001, the eRemote UE, and the eRelay UE.
  • the eRemote UE sends a request message to the eRelay UE, where the request message is used to request the eRelay UE to provide Layer 2 UE-to-NW Relay support for the eRemote UE. Then the eRelay UE receives the request message.
  • the admission request message is, for example, a layer 2 relay request message.
  • the eRelay UE sends an RRC message to the base station, to send information about the eRemote UE that establishes a non-3GPP connection with the eRelay UE to the base station. Then the base station receives the RRC message.
  • the RRC message is the non-3GPP Access Information in FIG.
  • the eRelay UE After receiving the request message sent by the eRemote UE, if the eRelay UE is in the RRC_IDLE state, the eRelay UE first initiates an RRC connection establishment process and transits to the RRC_CONNECTED state. After transitioning to the RRC_CONNECTED state, the eRelay UE sends the RRC message to the base station again. After receiving the request message sent by the eRemote UE, if the eRelay UE is already in the RRC_CONNECTED state, the eRelay UE may directly send the RRC message to the base station.
  • the base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message to the eRelay UE. Then the eRelay UE receives the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message.
  • the eRelay UE sends an accept request message to the eRemote UE to notify the eRemote UE that the eRelay UE has accepted the request. Then the eRemote UE receives the admission request message.
  • the admission request message is, for example, a layer 2 relay accept message.
  • the request message sent by the eRemote UE in S1002 and the admission request message sent by the eRelay UE in S1006 may be an RRC message.
  • the eRemote UE sends the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the first message is used to request a communication path conversion from the base station.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE, where the fourth message carries the third bearer configuration information and the identifier of the eRemote UE.
  • the fourth message further carries the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information.
  • the base station of the eRelay UE and the base station of the eRemote UE are not the same base station, the base station of the eRemote UE includes the information carried in the first message in S1006 in the sixth message sent by the base station of the eRelay UE.
  • the base station needs to acquire and save the correspondence between the identifier of the eRemote UE and the identifier of the eRelay UE.
  • the base station acquires the identifier of the eRemote UE and the identifier of the eRelay UE, including but not limited to the following implementation manners:
  • the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE After receiving the Layer 2 relay request message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE allocate an identifier for the eRemote UE that can uniquely identify the eRemote UE under the eRelay UE, and the identifier may be called Local of the eRemote UE. ID, for a description of the identification, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station. In the non-3GPP Access Information message, the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE is included.
  • the mapping relationship between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE may also be included.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE in which the eRemote UE establishes the non-3GPP connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1003, eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE and the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE are included.
  • the base station After the refined S1004 receives the non-3GPP Access Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE, where the RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message includes the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE in which the eRemote UE establishes the non-3GPP connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1003, eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE and the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE are included.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE in which the eRemote UE establishes the non-3GPP connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1007 after receiving the first message sent by the eRemote UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the fourth message the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE After receiving the Layer 2 relay request message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message includes a correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE is simultaneously notified to the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in a MAC PDU carrying a Layer 2 relay accept message.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE in which the eRemote UE establishes the non-3GPP connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE After receiving the Layer 2 relay request message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE send a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message including the eRelay UE The Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sent the Layer 2 relay request message.
  • the base station After the refined S1004 receives the non-3GPP Access Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE. In the RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE is simultaneously notified to the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in a MAC PDU carrying a Layer 2 relay accept message.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE in which the eRemote UE establishes the non-3GPP connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE After receiving the Layer 2 relay request message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE send a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE is simultaneously notified to the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRelay UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in a MAC PDU carrying a Layer 2 relay accept message.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE in which the eRemote UE establishes the non-3GPP connection is included. It can also contain the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1007 after receiving the first message sent by the eRemote UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the fourth message the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the LocalID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1002 and eRemote UEs send a Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE. Also transmitted with the Layer 2 relay request message is an identifier of the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRemote UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carrying the Layer 2 relay request message.
  • the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE After receiving the Layer 2 relay request message of the eRemote UE, the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message may further include a correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE that send the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE.
  • the refined S1002 and eRemote UEs send a Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE. Also transmitted with the Layer 2 relay request message is an identifier of the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRemote UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carrying the Layer 2 relay request message.
  • the refined S1003, eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message further includes a Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE.
  • the base station After the refined S1004 receives the non-3GPP Access Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE. In the RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1002 and eRemote UEs send a Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE. Also transmitted with the Layer 2 relay request message is an identifier of the eRemote UE.
  • the identifier of the eRemote UE may be the C-RNTI of the eRelay UE.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE may be transmitted through a MAC CE in the MAC PDU carrying the Layer 2 relay request message.
  • the refined S1003, eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the C-RNTI of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message further includes a Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE.
  • the refined S1007 after receiving the first message sent by the eRemote UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the fourth message the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE After receiving the Layer 2 relay request message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE allocate a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message includes a correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE After receiving the Layer 2 relay request message sent by the eRemote UE, the refined S1003 and the eRelay UE send a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the non-3GPP Access Information message the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the base station After the refined S1004 receives the non-3GPP Access Information message sent by the eRelay UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE. The base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message to the eRelay UE. In the RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton message, the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1003, eRelay UE sends a non-3GPP Access Information message to the base station.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE that sends the Layer 2 relay request message to the eRelay UE is included.
  • the refined S1006 and the eRemote UE send the first message to the base station, and the base station receives the first message.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the refined S1007 after receiving the first message sent by the eRemote UE, the base station allocates a Local ID to the eRemote UE.
  • the base station sends a fourth message to the eRelay UE.
  • the fourth message the correspondence between the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Local ID of the eRemote UE is included.
  • the Layer-2 ID of the eRemote UE and the Layer-2 ID of the eRelay UE are It uses the MAC address in the non-3GPP access technology.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication path conversion method.
  • a special case is introduced: the eRemote UE sends a path switching request message to the first base station, that is, the eRemote UE sends the first message to the first base station. After the eRemote UE sends the first message to the first base station, the eRemote UE receives the RRC connection reconfiguration message including the mobility control information (Mobility Control Info) sent by the first base station, where the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to indicate The eRemote UE switches to the third base station.
  • Mobility Control Info mobility control information
  • the path change request message sent by the eRemote UE may not be received. Therefore, in this case, when the eRemote UE switches to the first After the three base stations, the third base station does not know the path conversion request of the eRemote UE. Then, at this time, how should the eRemote UE handle it.
  • the base station measures the quality of communication with the eRemote UE. If the first base station determines that the communication quality with the eRemote UE is poor, or for other reasons, such as the first base station is heavily loaded, etc., the first The base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message including the Mobility Control Info to the eRemote UE to instruct the eRemote UE to switch to the third base station.
  • the eRemote UE may send the first message to the first base station, and the eRemote UE receives the RRC connection reconfiguration message that is sent by the first base station and includes the mobility control information, the eRemote UE may The length is used to determine whether the first base station has transmitted the path switch request message to the third base station. If t is greater than or equal to T, the RRC connection reconfiguration message can be regarded as the second message, and then the eRemote UE can be processed according to the method shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, in this case.
  • the third base station and the second base station where the eRelay UE is located may be the same base station.
  • the eRemote UE determines that t is less than T, the eRemote UE first performs handover according to the RRC connection reconfiguration message, that is, the handover from the first base station to the third base station.
  • the eRemote UE For the handover process of the eRemote UE, refer to the prior art, and no further description is provided. .
  • the eRemote UE After the eRemote UE switches from the first base station to the third base station, the eRemote UE sends a first message to the third base station, that is, because the third base station does not know that the eRemote UE is to perform communication path conversion, the eRemote UE is in the new serving cell.
  • the second base station and the second base station where the eRelay UE is located may be the same base station, or may be different base stations.
  • the eRemote UE performs communication path conversion refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 - FIG. The description of any one of the illustrated embodiments will not be repeated. In this way, it is ensured that the eRemote UE can successfully complete the conversion of the communication path.
  • the length of the T may be predefined by a standard or a protocol, or may be configured by the base station to the eRemote UE through a dedicated message or a system message.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a computer device 1100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the computer device 1100 includes at least one processor 1101, a communication bus 1102, a memory 1103, and at least one communication interface 1104.
  • the computer device 1100 shown in FIG. 11 can be used to implement the first user equipment, ie, eRemote, as described in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG.
  • the UE which can also be used to implement the second user equipment, that is, the eRelay UE, in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG.
  • the network device or the first network device that is, the base station or the first base station, according to any one of the embodiments shown in FIG.
  • the processor 1101 may be a general purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling program execution of an embodiment of the present invention. .
  • CPU general purpose central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • Communication bus 1102 can include a path for communicating information between the components described above.
  • the communication interface 1104 uses devices such as any transceiver for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, Radio Access Network (RAN), Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN), and the like.
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Networks
  • the memory 1103 can be a read-only memory (ROM) or other type of static storage device that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (RAM) or other type that can store information and instructions.
  • the dynamic storage device may also be an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM), a Compact Disc Read-Only Memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, or a disc storage device ( Including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be stored by a computer Any other media taken, but not limited to this.
  • the memory 1103 may be independent and connected to the processor 1101 via a bus.
  • the memory 1103 can also be integrated with the processor 1101.
  • the memory 1103 is used to store application code for executing the solution of the present invention, and is controlled by the processor 1101 to execute.
  • the processor 1101 is configured to execute application code stored in the memory 1103. If the first user device, the second user device, or the first network device is implemented by the computer device 1100, one or more software modules may be stored in the memory 1103 of the first user device, the second user device, or the first network device. The first user device, the second user device, or the first network device may implement the stored software module through the processor 1101 and program code in the memory 1103 to implement conversion of the communication path.
  • the processor 1101 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG.
  • the computer device 1100 may include a plurality of processors 1101, such as the first processor 11011 and the second processor 11012 in FIG. 11, wherein the first processor 11011 and the second processing The device 11012.
  • the reasoning is different and the reference numerals are different, just to distinguish the plurality of processors 1101.
  • Each of these processors 1101 may be a single-CPU processor 1101 or a multi-CPU processor 1101.
  • Processor 1101 herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data, such as computer program instructions.
  • the computer device 1100 described above may be a general purpose computer device or a special purpose computer device. Embodiments of the invention do not limit the type of computer device 1100.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment, where the user equipment includes a sending unit 1201, a receiving unit 1202, and a processing unit 1203.
  • the sending unit 1201 is configured to send a first message to the first network device, where the first message is used to request to convert the communication path between the user equipment and the first network device from the direct connection path to the second user equipment.
  • a non-direct connection path of the network device where the first message includes a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, an identifier of the user equipment, and the user equipment and the second user equipment
  • At least one of communication technologies used by the communication link; the first network device and the second network device are the same network device or different network devices;
  • the receiving unit 1202 is configured to receive a second message sent by the first network device, where the second message carries at least one of first indication information and first bearer configuration information used to notify the user equipment to perform communication path conversion;
  • the processing unit 1203 is configured to perform communication path conversion according to the first indication information.
  • the first bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one first radio bearer and the at least one second radio bearer, and the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the user equipment and the second user equipment; the second radio bearer is a communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device Wireless bearer.
  • processing unit 1203 is further configured to:
  • the receiving unit 1202 After the receiving unit 1202 receives the second message sent by the first network device, if the second message includes the first indication information, enabling adaptation for processing data transmitted between the second user equipment and the second network device is enabled.
  • Floor if the second message includes the first indication information, enabling adaptation for processing data transmitted between the second user equipment and the second network device is enabled.
  • the radio link control entity and the logical channel of the first radio bearer are reconfigured according to the first bearer configuration information.
  • processing unit 1203 is further configured to:
  • the sending unit 1201 Before the sending unit 1201 sends the first message to the first network device, establish a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • processing unit 1203 is further configured to:
  • the receiving unit 1202 After the receiving unit 1202 receives the second message sent by the first network device, establishing a communication connection with the second user equipment.
  • the second network device is the same network device as the first network device
  • the processing unit 1203 is further configured to: after the receiving unit 1202 receives the second message sent by the first network device, continue to perform data communication with the first network device by using the direct connection path; establish a communication connection with the second user equipment;
  • the sending unit 1201 is further configured to: send, by using the second user equipment, a third message to the first network device, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed;
  • the processing unit 1203 is further configured to: disconnect the direct connection path with the first network device.
  • the second network device is a different network device from the first network device, and the second message includes information used to indicate that the user device switches to the second network device;
  • the processing unit 1203 is further configured to: after the receiving unit 1202 receives the second message sent by the first network device, continue to perform data communication with the first network device by using the direct connection path; establish a communication connection with the second user equipment;
  • the sending unit 1201 is further configured to: send, by using the second user equipment, a third message to the second network device, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed;
  • the processing unit 1203 is further configured to: disconnect the direct connection path with the first network device.
  • the second network device is a different network device from the first network device, and the second message includes information used to indicate that the user device switches to the second network device;
  • the processing unit 1203 is further configured to: after the receiving unit 1202 receives the second message sent by the first network device, switch from the first network device to the second network device according to the indication of the second message; establish a communication connection with the second user device ;
  • the sending unit 1201 is further configured to: send, by using the second user equipment, a third message to the second network device, where the third message is used to indicate that the communication path conversion process has been completed.
  • processing unit 1203 is further configured to:
  • the physical device corresponding to the sending unit 1201 and the receiving unit 1202 may be the communication interface 1104 in FIG. 11, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit 1203 may be the processor 1101 in FIG.
  • the physical device corresponding to the processing unit 1203 may be the processor 1101 in FIG.
  • some communication interfaces 1104 implement the function of the receiving unit 1202, and some communication interfaces 1104 can implement the transmitting unit.
  • the user equipment may be used to perform the method provided by any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B and the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, for example, may be the first user equipment as described above.
  • eRemote UE eRemote UE. Therefore, for the functions and the like implemented by the units in the user equipment, reference may be made to the description of the previous method part, and details are not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment, where the user equipment includes a receiving unit 1301 and a processing unit 1302.
  • the receiving unit 1301 is configured to receive a fourth message sent by the second network device, where the fourth message carries second indication information and/or a second information for informing the user equipment to provide non-direct path support for the first user equipment.
  • the processing unit 1302 is configured to configure, according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the identifier of the first user equipment, the radio bearer of the communication link with the first user equipment, and according to the first user equipment
  • the identification and the third bearer configuration information are configured to transmit a radio bearer of data and signaling of the first user equipment on a communication link between the user equipment and the second network device.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer, and a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer;
  • the third bearer configuration information includes: a configuration of a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer; wherein the third radio bearer is used for transmitting a communication link between the user equipment and the first user equipment A radio bearer for data and signaling of the first user equipment, the fourth radio bearer being a radio bearer for transmitting data and signaling of the first user equipment over a communication link between the user equipment and the second network device.
  • the processing unit 1302 configures a radio bearer of a communication link with the first user equipment according to the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the identifier of the first user equipment, and according to the The identifier of the user equipment and the third bearer configuration information are configured to transmit the radio bearer of the data and signaling of the first user equipment on the communication link between the user equipment and the second network device, including:
  • the fourth message includes the second indication information, enabling the first adaptation layer for processing data transmitted between the first user equipment and the second network device;
  • the fourth message includes the second bearer configuration information, establishing a radio link control entity and a logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer;
  • the user equipment further includes a sending unit 1303, which is shown together in FIG. Since the transmitting unit 1303 is an optional functional unit, in order to distinguish from the mandatory functional unit, the transmitting unit 1303 is represented as a broken line in FIG.
  • the sending unit 1303 is configured to:
  • the cell identifier of the serving cell of the user equipment and the identifier of the user equipment are sent to the first user equipment.
  • the user equipment further includes a sending unit 1303, which can be seen in FIG.
  • the processing unit 1302 is further configured to: obtain an identifier of the first user equipment;
  • the sending unit 1303 is configured to: send, to the network device, a fifth message, where the fifth message carries at least one of an identifier of the first user equipment and an identifier of the user equipment.
  • the physical device corresponding to the sending unit 1303 and the receiving unit 1301 may be the communication interface 1104 in FIG. 11, and the physical device corresponding to the processing unit 1203 may be the processor 1101 in FIG.
  • the physical device corresponding to the processing unit 1203 may be the processor 1101 in FIG.
  • some communication interfaces 1104 implement the function of the receiving unit 1301, and some communication interfaces 1104 can implement the transmitting unit.
  • the user equipment can be used to perform any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B above - the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the method provided may be, for example, a second user equipment as previously described, such as an eRelay UE. Therefore, for the functions and the like implemented by the units in the user equipment, reference may be made to the description of the previous method part, and details are not described herein.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a network device, where the network device includes a receiving unit 1401 and a sending unit 1402.
  • the receiving unit 1401 is configured to receive a first message sent by the first user equipment, where the first message is used to request to convert a communication path between the first user equipment and the network device from a direct connection path to a second user equipment.
  • An indirect path that is in communication with the second network device, where the first message includes a cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment, an identifier of the second user equipment, an identifier of the first user equipment, and the first user equipment and At least one of communication technologies used by the communication link between the second user equipment; the network device and the second network device are the same network device or different network devices;
  • the sending unit 1402 is configured to send a second message to the first user equipment, where the second message carries first indication information used to notify the first user equipment to perform communication path conversion.
  • the second message further carries the first bearer configuration information, where the first bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one first radio bearer and the at least one second radio bearer, and the at least one first wireless Carrying a configuration of a corresponding radio link control entity and a logical channel; the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment; and the second radio bearer is for the second user A radio bearer of a communication link between the device and the second network device.
  • the first bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one first radio bearer and the at least one second radio bearer, and the at least one first wireless Carrying a configuration of a corresponding radio link control entity and a logical channel
  • the first radio bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the first user equipment and the second user equipment
  • the second radio bearer is for the second user A radio bearer of a communication link between the device and the second network device.
  • the sending unit 1402 is further configured to: after the receiving unit 1401 receives the first message sent by the first user equipment, send a fourth message to the second user equipment, where the fourth message carries The device provides the second user equipment with the second indication information and/or the second bearer configuration information, and the second bearer configuration information is used by the second user equipment to configure the radio bearer.
  • the second bearer configuration information includes: a mapping relationship between the at least one third radio bearer and the at least one fourth radio bearer, and a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one third radio bearer, And a configuration of the radio link control entity and the logical channel corresponding to the at least one fourth radio bearer; wherein the third radio bearer is a radio bearer for the communication link between the second user equipment and the first user equipment, the fourth radio The bearer is a radio bearer for a communication link between the second user equipment and the second network device.
  • the network device and the second network device are different network devices
  • the sending unit 1402 is further configured to: before sending the second message to the first user equipment, if the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second user equipment carried in the first message indicates that the serving cell is a cell deployed under the second network device, The second network device sends a sixth message, where the sixth message is used to request to switch the first user equipment from the network device to the second network device; the sixth message carries the information carried in the first message;
  • the receiving unit 1401 is further configured to: receive a seventh message sent by the second network device, where the seventh message carries the first bearer configuration information.
  • the physical device corresponding to the sending unit 1402 and the receiving unit 1401 may be the communication interface 1104 in FIG. It can be considered that when the user equipment is implemented by the computer device 1100 shown in FIG. 11, in the communication interface 1104 in FIG. 11, some communication interfaces 1104 implement the function of the receiving unit 1401, and some communication interfaces 1104 can implement the transmitting unit.
  • the function of the 1402. it can be considered that in the communication interface 1104 in FIG. 11, it is possible that each communication interface 1104 can implement both the function of the receiving unit 1401 and the function of the transmitting unit 1402.
  • the network device may be used to perform the method provided by any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B and the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, for example, may be a base station or a first base station as described above. . Therefore, for the functions and the like implemented by the units in the user equipment, reference may be made to the description of the previous method part, and details are not described herein.
  • the network device sends a second message to the first user equipment, indicating that the first user equipment converts the communication path from the direct connection path to the indirect connection path. That is, when the network device indicates the first user equipment to perform path conversion, instead of determining, by the first user equipment, when to perform the conversion, the network device can perform scheduling according to the service, thereby ensuring that the first user equipment is in the path conversion as much as possible. Continuity of business before and after.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a computer storage medium, wherein the computer storage medium may store a program, where the program is executed, including the first user equipment (ie, eRemote UE) described in any one of the foregoing method embodiments. All the steps.
  • the computer storage medium may store a program, where the program is executed, including the first user equipment (ie, eRemote UE) described in any one of the foregoing method embodiments. All the steps.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a computer storage medium, wherein the computer storage medium may store a program, where the program is executed, including the second user equipment (ie, eRelay UE) described in any one of the foregoing method embodiments. All the steps.
  • the second user equipment ie, eRelay UE
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a computer storage medium, wherein the computer storage medium may store a program, where the program includes the first network device (ie, a base station, or partially implemented) as described in any one of the foregoing method embodiments. All the steps performed by the first base station in the example).
  • the first network device ie, a base station, or partially implemented
  • embodiments of the invention may be provided as a method, system, or computer program product.
  • embodiments of the invention may be in the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • embodiments of the invention may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
  • Embodiments of the invention are described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to embodiments of the invention. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowchart illustrations and/or FIG.
  • These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine for the execution of instructions for execution by a processor of a computer or other programmable data processing device.
  • the computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device.
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device.
  • the instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

一种通信路径转换方法及设备，用以解决eRemote UE在进行链路转换后业务不连续的问题。其中一种通信路径转换方法包括：第一用户设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息，第一消息用于请求将第一用户设备的通信路径从直连路径转换为非直连路径。第一用户设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知第一用户设备进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种信息。第一用户设备根据第一指示信息进行通信路径转换。其中，第一消息中包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、第一用户设备的标识、以及第一用户设备和第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种。

Description

一种通信路径转换方法及设备
本申请要求于2017年2月3日提交中国专利局、申请号为PCT/CN2017/072864，发明名称为“一种通信路径转换方法及设备”的PCT申请的优先权，同时也要求于2017年1月10日提交中国专利局，申请号为201710018783.X，发明名称为“一种路径切换方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本发明涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信路径转换方法及设备。
背景技术
在长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)的版本13(Rel-13)中，第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project，3GPP)研究并标准化了用户设备到网络中继(UE-to-Network Relay)功能。即，一个UE可以直接与基站连接，采用直连方式与基站通信，或者也可以通过中继UE(Relay UE)与基站连接进行通信，那么通过Relay UE与基站进行通信的UE可称为远端UE(Remote UE)。
在Rel-13中，标准化的Relay UE是通过网际协议(Internet Protocol，IP)层，即层三(Layer 3)对Remote UE和基站之间的数据进行转发的，这种架构可称为Layer 3Relay架构。通过Relay UE的IP层对Remote UE和基站之间的数据进行转发，会存在一些问题，主要包括：(1)数据安全问题。Remote UE的数据到达Relay UE后，Relay UE的分组数据汇聚协议((Packet Data Convergence Protocol，PDCP)层会解出Remote UE的数据，之后再重新封装转发给基站，即，Relay UE会得知数据的内容，因此，无法保证Remote UE的数据在Relay UE处的安全性；(2)业务连续性问题。Remote UE如果要进行路径转换，例如要从与基站之间的蜂窝链路转换为通过Relay UE与基站通信的中继链路，一般都是由Remote UE的应用层(Application layer)自己决定何时将数据通信从蜂窝链路转换到中继链路，无法保证转换前后业务的连续性。
那么，为了解决通过Relay UE来传输Remote UE和基站之间的数据时存在的数据安全性等问题，目前提出可以采用基于无线链路控制(Radio Link Control，RLC)层以上以及PDCP层以下的数据中继方式，这也是目前LTE Rel 15中的一个研究课题。这种通过在Relay UE的RLC层以上以及PDCP层以下进行数据转发的方式可以称为层2用户设备到网络中继(Layer 2UE-to-NW Relay)，即，将Relay UE中新增的用于向基站转发数据的层认为是层2。这种情况下，Remote UE可以称为演进的远端用户设备(Evolved Remote UE，eRemote UE)，Relay UE可以称为演进的中继用户设备(Evolved Relay UE，eRelay UE或者Evolved UE-to-NW Relay)。例如将新增的层称为适配(adaptation)层，即，从Remote UE接收的数据会通过Relay UE的adaptation层转发给基站，数据不会到达PDCP层，从而Relay UE也就不会获得数据的内容，保障了数据在Relay UE处的安全。
然而，通过adaptation层转发数据，只是解决了数据安全性问题，对于业务连续性的问题还是未解决。按照目前的方案，eRemote UE如果要进行路径转换，例如要从与基站之间直连通信的蜂窝路径转换为通过eRelay UE与基站通信的中继路径，还是会由eRemote UE的应用层(Application layer)自己决定何时将数据通信从蜂窝路径转换到中继路径，依然无法保证转换前后业务的连续性。
发明内容
本发明实施例提供一种通信路径转换方法及设备，用以解决eRemote UE在进行链路转换后业务不连续的技术问题。
第一方面，提供一种通信路径转换方法，该方法由第一用户设备执行，第一用户设备例如为eRemote UE。另外该方法中还涉及第二用户设备，第二用户设备例如为eRelay UE。该方法包括：第一用户设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息，第一消息用于请求将第一用户设备与第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直 连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径。第一用户设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知第一用户设备进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种信息。第一用户设备根据第一指示信息进行通信路径转换。其中，第一消息中包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、第一用户设备的标识、以及第一用户设备和第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种，第一网络设备与第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备。
本发明实施例中，如果第一用户设备请求进行路径转换，那么网络设备会向第一用户设备发送第二消息，指示第一用户设备将通信路径由直连路径转换为非直连路径，也就是由网络设备来指示第一用户设备何时进行路径转换，而不是由第一用户设备自行确定何时进行转换，那么网络设备就可以根据业务进行调度，从而尽量保证第一用户设备在路径转换前后的业务的连续性。
而且，在第一消息中还包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、及第一用户设备的标识中的至少一种，即使通过adaptation来转发数据，不借助于IP层，通过本发明实施例提供的方式也可以使得网络设备确定第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备，从而网络设备可以为第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备配置无线承载，或网络设备后续可以向第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备发送下行数据。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第一无线承载为用于第一用户设备和第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载，第二无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
解释了第一承载配置信息包括的内容，从而第一用户设备可以根据第一承载配置信息来进行配置。相当于，由网络设备来为用户设备提供无线承载的配置，网络设备可以根据eRemote UE的业务的服务质量(Quality of Service，QoS)需求，为其配置eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的无线承载，有助于保证eRemote UE的业务的QoS。
结合第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，在第一用户设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：若第二消息中包含第一指示信息，则第一用户设备使能用于处理通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备间传递的数据的适配层；若第二消息中包含第一承载配置信息，则第一用户设备根据第一承载配置信息重新配置第一无线承载的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。
根据第二消息中包含的信息，第一用户设备可以进行相应的处理，从而能够顺利完成通信路径的转换。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，在第一用户设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息之前，还包括:第一用户设备与第二用户设备建立通信连接。
一种实现方式就是，第一用户设备先与第二用户设备建立通信连接，再向第一网络设备发送第一消息。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，在第一用户设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：第一用户设备与第二用户设备建立通信连接。
另一种实现方式就是，第一用户设备先向第一网络设备发送第一消息，再与第二用户设备建立通信连接。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中的任一 种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为同一网络设备。那么，在第一用户设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：第一用户设备继续通过直连路径与第一网络设备进行数据通信。第一用户设备与第二用户设备建立通信连接。第一用户设备通过第二用户设备向第一网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成，且第一用户设备断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径。
在这种实现方式中，第一用户设备保持与第一网络设备之间的直连路径，直到通信路径转换完成后第一用户设备再断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径，转为通过非直连路径进行通信，尽量避免第一用户设备的业务中断，保证业务的连续性。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，第二消息中包含用于指示第一用户设备切换到第二网络设备的信息。那么，在第一用户设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：第一用户设备继续通过直连路径与第一网络设备进行数据通信；第一用户设备与第二用户设备建立通信连接；第一用户设备通过第二用户设备向第二网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成，且第一用户设备断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径。
即使直连路径中的网络设备与非直连路径中的网络设备是不同的网络设备，第一用户设备也可以保持与第一网络设备之间的直连路径，直到通信路径转换完成后第一用户设备再断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径，转为通过非直连路径进行通信，尽量避免第一用户设备的业务中断，保证业务的连续性。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，第二消息中包含用于指示第一用户设备切换到第二网络设备的信息。那么，在第一用户设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：第一用户设备根据第二消息的指示，从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备。第一用户设备与第二用户设备建立通信连接。第一用户设备通过第二用户设备向第二网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成。
在这种实现方式中，如果直连路径中的网络设备与非直连路径中的网络设备是不同的网络设备，则第一用户设备先进行网络设备的切换，即从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备，之后第一用户设备再与第二用户设备建立通信连接，完成从直连路径到非直连路径的转换。也就是说，如果直连路径中的网络设备与非直连路径中的网络设备是不同的网络设备，那么第一用户设备可以直接与第二用户设备建立连接，或者也可以切换到第二网络设备后再与第二用户设备建立连接，可根据不同情况灵活选择不同的处理方式。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：第一用户设备在与第二用户设备之间的发现过程中获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识；或者，第一用户设备在与第二用户设备建立通信连接的过程中获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识；或者，第一用户设备在与第二用户设备建立通信连接后获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备标识。
第一用户设备可以通过多种不同的方式来获得第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识，较为灵活。
第二方面，提供一种通信路径转换方法，该方法由第二用户设备执行，第二用户设备例如为eRelay UE。另外该方法中还涉及第一用户设备，第一用户设备例如为eRemote UE。该方法包括：第二用户设 备接收第二网络设备发送的第四消息，第四消息携带用于通知第二用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及，第三承载配置信息和第一用户设备的标识。第二用户设备根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及第一用户设备的标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一用户设备的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在第二用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
本发明实施例中，如果第一用户设备请求进行路径转换，那么网络设备会向第二用户设备发送第四消息，指示第二用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持，也就是由网络设备来指示第一用户设备和第二用户设备何时进行路径转换，而不是由第一用户设备自行确定何时进行转换，那么网络设备就可以根据业务进行调度，从而尽量保证第一用户设备在路径转换前后的业务的连续性。
而且，由网络设备向第二用户设备发送承载配置信息，即由网络设备为第二用户设备配置无线承载，从而可以保证第一用户设备和第二用户设备的QoS。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第三承载配置信息包括：至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。其中，第三无线承载为用于在第二用户设备和第一用户设备间的通信链路传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于在第二用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
解释了第二承载配置信息和第三承载配置信息包括的内容，从而第二用户设备可以根据第二承载配置信息，或根据第二承载配置信息和第三承载配置信息来进行配置。相当于，由网络设备来为用户设备提供无线承载的配置，网络设备可以根据eRemote UE和eRelay UE的业务的QoS需求，为eRelay UE配置无线承载，有助于保证eRemote UE的业务的QoS。
结合第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，第二用户设备根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及第一用户设备标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一用户设备的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在第二用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，包括：若第四消息中包含第二指示信息，则第二用户设备使能用于处理第一用户设备与第二网络设备间传递的数据的第一适配层；若第四消息中包含第二承载配置信息，则第二用户设备建立至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道；第二用户设备重新建立或者重新配置至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道，以及使能处理第四无线承载传输的数据的第二适配层。
根据第四消息中包含的信息，第二用户设备可以进行相应的处理，从而使得第一用户设备能够顺利完成通信路径的转换。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：第二用户设备在与第一用户设备之间的发现过程中将第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备；或者，第二用户设备在与第一用户设备建立通信连接的过程中将第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备；或者，第二用户设备在与第一用户设备建立通信连接后将第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备。
第二用户设备可以选择不同的时机将第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备，较为灵活。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二种可能的实现方式或第三种可能的实现 方式，在第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：第二用户设备获取第一用户设备的标识。第二用户设备向网络设备发送第五消息，第五消息携带第一用户设备的标识和第二用户设备的标识中的至少一个。
即使通过adaptation来转发数据，不借助于IP层，通过本发明实施例提供的方式也可以使得网络设备根据设备的标识来确定第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备，从而网络设备可以为第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备配置无线承载，或网络设备后续可以向第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备发送下行数据。
第三方面，提供一种通信路径转换方法，该方法由第一网络设备执行。该方法包括：第一网络设备接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息，第一消息用于请求将第一用户设备与第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径，第一网络设备向第一用户设备发送第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知第一用户设备进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息。其中，第一消息中包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、第一用户设备的标识、以及第一用户设备和第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；第一网络设备与第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备。
本发明实施例中，如果第一用户设备请求进行路径转换，那么第一网络设备会向第一用户设备发送第二消息，指示第一用户设备将通信路径由直连路径转换为非直连路径，也就是由第一网络设备来指示第一用户设备何时进行路径转换，而不是由第一用户设备自行确定何时进行转换，那么第一网络设备就可以根据业务进行调度，从而尽量保证第一用户设备在路径转换前后的业务的连续性。
而且，在第一消息中还包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、及第一用户设备的标识中的至少一种，即使通过adaptation来转发数据，不借助于IP层，通过本发明实施例提供的方式也可以使得第一网络设备确定第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备，从而第一网络设备可以为第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备配置无线承载，或第一网络设备后续可以向第二用户设备和/或第一用户设备发送下行数据。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息还携带第一承载配置信息，第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第一无线承载为用于第一用户设备和第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载，第二无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
解释了第一承载配置信息包括的内容，从而第一用户设备可以根据第一承载配置信息来进行配置。相当于，由第一网络设备来为用户设备提供无线承载的配置，第一网络设备可以根据eRemote UE的业务的QoS需求，为其配置eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的无线承载，有助于保证eRemote UE的业务的QoS。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，在第一网络设备接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息之后，还包括：第一网络设备向第二用户设备发送第四消息，第四消息携带用于通知第二用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，第二承载配置信息用于第二用户设备配置无线承载。
也就是说，如果第一用户设备请求进行路径转换，那么网络设备会向第二用户设备发送第四消息，指示第二用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持，也就是由网络设备来指示第一用户设备和第二用户设备何时进行路径转换，而不是由第一用户设备自行确定何时进行转换，那么网络设备就可以根据业务进行调度，从而尽量保证第一用户设备在路径转换前后的业务的连续性。而且，由网络设备向第二用户设备发送承载配置信息，即由网络设备为第二用户设备配置无线承载，从而可以保证第一用户设备 和第二用户设备的QoS。
结合第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置，以及至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。其中，第三无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备间的通信链路的无线承载。
结合第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备与第二网络设备为不同的网络设备。那么，在第一网络设备向第一用户设备发送第二消息之前，还包括：若第一消息携带的第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识指示服务小区为第二网络设备下部署的小区，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第六消息，第六消息用于请求将第一用户设备从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备，第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第七消息，第七消息携带第一承载配置信息。第六消息携带第一消息中携带的信息。
即，如果直连路径中的网络设备与非直连路径中的网络设备不是一个网络设备，那么第一网络设备会向第二网络设备请求将第一用户设备从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备，以顺利完成通信路径的转换。
第四方面，提供一种用户设备，该用户设备包括发送器、接收器和处理器。其中，发送器用于向第一网络设备发送第一消息，第一消息用于请求将该用户设备与第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径。其中，第一消息中包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、该用户设备的标识、以及该用户设备和第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种，第一网络设备与第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备。接收器用于接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知该用户设备进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种信息。处理器用于根据第一指示信息进行通信路径转换。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第一无线承载为用于该用户设备和第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载，第二无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
结合第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，处理器还用于：在接收器接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，若第二消息中包含第一指示信息，则使能用于处理通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备间传递的数据的适配层。若第二消息中包含第一承载配置信息，则根据第一承载配置信息重新配置第一无线承载的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，处理器还用于：在发送器向第一网络设备发送第一消息之前，与第二用户设备建立通信连接。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，处理器还用于：在接收器接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，与第二用户设备建立通信连接。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为同一网络设备。那么，处理器还用于：在接收器接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，继续通过直连路径与第一网络设备进 行数据通信，与第二用户设备建立通信连接。发送器还用于：通过第二用户设备向第一网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成。处理器还用于：断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第六种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，第二消息中包含用于指示该用户设备切换到第二网络设备的信息。那么，处理器还用于：在接收器接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，继续通过直连路径与第一网络设备进行数据通信，与第二用户设备建立通信连接。发送器还用于：通过第二用户设备向第二网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成。处理器还用于：断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，第二消息中包含用于指示该用户设备切换到第二网络设备的信息。那么，处理器还用于：在接收器接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，根据第二消息的指示，从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备，与第二用户设备建立通信连接。发送器还用于：通过第二用户设备向第二网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，处理器还用于：在与第二用户设备之间的发现过程中获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识；或者，在与第二用户设备建立通信连接的过程中获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识；或者，在与第二用户设备建立通信连接后获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识。
第五方面，提供一种用户设备，该用户设备包括接收器和处理器。其中，接收器用于接收第二网络设备发送的第四消息，第四消息携带用于通知该用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及，第三承载配置信息和第一用户设备的标识。处理器用于根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及第一用户设备的标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一用户设备的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在该用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第三承载配置信息包括：至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。其中，第三无线承载为用于在该用户设备和第一用户设备间的通信链路传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于在该用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
结合第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，处理器根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及第一用户设备的标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一用户设备的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在该用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，包括：若第四消息中包含第二指示信息，则使能用于处理第一用户设备与第二网络设备间传递的数据的第一适配层。若第四消息中包含第二承载配置信息，则建立至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。重新建立或者重新配置至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道，以及使能处理第四无线承载传输的数据的第二适配层。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，该用户设备还包括发送器。该发送器用于：在与第一用户设备之间的发现过程中将该用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和该用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备；或者，在与第一用户设备建立通信连接的过程中将该用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和该用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备；或者，在与第一用户设备建立通信连接后将该用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和该用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三种可能的实现方式中的任一种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，该用户设备还包括发送器。处理器还用于：获取第一用户设备的标识。发送器用于：向网络设备发送第五消息，第五消息携带该用户设备的标识和该用户设备的标识中的至少一个。
第六方面，提供一种网络设备，该网络设备包括接收器和发送器。其中，接收器用于接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息，第一消息用于请求将第一用户设备与该网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径。其中，第一消息中包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、第一用户设备的标识、以及第一用户设备和第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种，该网络设备与第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备。发送器用于向第一用户设备发送第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知第一用户设备进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息还携带第一承载配置信息，第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第一无线承载为用于第一用户设备和第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载，第二无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，发送器还用于：在接收器接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息之后，向第二用户设备发送第四消息，第四消息携带用于通知第二用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，第二承载配置信息用于第二用户设备配置无线承载。
结合第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置，以及至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。其中，第三无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路的无线承载。
结合第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，该网络设备与第二网络设备为不同的网络设备。那么，发送器还用于：在向第一用户设备发送第二消息之前，若第一消息携带的第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识指示服务小区为第二网络设备下部署的小区，向第二网络设备发送第六消息，第六消息用于请求将第一用户设备从该网络设备切换到第二网络设备，第六消息携带第一消息中携带的信息。接收器还用于：接收第二网络设备发送的第七消息，第七消息携带第一承载配置信息。
第七方面，提供一种用户设备，该用户设备包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式所提供的方法的功能单元。
第八方面，提供一种用户设备，该用户设备包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现 方式所提供的方法的功能单元。
第九方面，提供一种网络设备，该网络设备包括用于执行第三方面或第三方面的任一种可能的实现方式所提供的方法的功能单元。
第十方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，用于储存为上述用户设备所用的计算机软件指令，其包含用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式为用户设备所设计的程序。
第十一方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，用于储存为上述用户设备所用的计算机软件指令，其包含用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式为用户设备所设计的程序。
第十二方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，用于储存为上述网络设备所用的计算机软件指令，其包含用于执行第三方面或第三方面的任一种可能的实现方式为网络设备所设计的程序。
本发明实施例中，可由网络设备来指示用户设备何时进行路径转换，而不是由用户设备自行确定何时进行转换，那么网络设备就可以根据业务进行调度，从而尽量保证用户设备在路径转换前后的业务的连续性。
附图说明
图1为Remote UE通过Relay UE与基站连接的接入网侧的网络架构示意图；
图2A为Remote UE和Relay UE从直连通信方式到非直连通信方式的转换过程示意图；
图2B为Remote UE和Relay UE从非直连通信方式到直连通信方式的转换过程示意图；
图3为在Layer 3Relay架构中Remote UE从蜂窝链路到中继链路的路径转换的流程图；
图4为本发明实施例提供的一种通信路径转换方法的流程图；
图5为本发明实施例提供的一种通信路径转换方法的流程图；
图6为本发明实施例提供的一种通信路径转换方法的流程图；
图7为本发明实施例提供的一种通信路径转换方法的流程图；
图8为本发明实施例提供的eRemote UE和eRelay UE通过3GPP技术建立通信连接的过程的流程图；
图9为本发明实施例提供的eRemote UE和eRelay UE通过3GPP技术建立通信连接的过程的流程图；
图10为本发明实施例提供的eRemote UE和eRelay UE通过非3GPP技术建立通信连接的过程的流程图；
图11为本发明实施例提供的计算机设备的结构示意图；
图12为本发明实施例提供的第一用户设备的结构示意图；
图13为本发明实施例提供的第二用户设备的结构示意图；
图14为本发明实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
为使本发明实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图，对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。
本文中描述的技术不仅限于LTE系统，还可用于多种通信系统，例如未来的第五代移动通信系统(5G)，以及其他可能的通信系统。
以下，对本发明实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。
1)用户设备，是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该用户设备可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network，RAN)与核心网进行通信，与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该用户设备可以包括用户设备(User Equipment，UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、订户单元(Subscriber Unit)、订户站(Subscriber Station)，移动站(Mobile Station)、移动台(Mobile)、远程站(Remote Station)、接入点(Access Point， AP)、远程终端设备(Remote Terminal)、接入终端设备(Access Terminal)、用户终端设备(User Terminal)、用户代理(User Agent)、或用户装备(User Device)等。例如，可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)，具有移动终端设备的计算机，便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置，智能穿戴式设备等。例如，个人通信业务(Personal Communication Service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(SIP)话机、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、智能手表、智能头盔、智能眼镜、智能手环等设备。
本发明实施例中涉及的用户主要包括第一用户设备和第二用户设备，其中第一用户设备例如为eRemote UE，第二用户设备例如为eRelay UE。其中eRelay UE能够为eRemote UE提供中继服务，使得eRemote UE通过eRelay UE与基站通信。eRemote UE和eRelay UE都可以通过以上介绍的任意一种用户设备来实现。
eRemote UE和基站之间可通过Uu接口连接，eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间可通过侧行(Sidelink)技术连接，则eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的接口为PC5接口。或者，eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间也可通过非3GPP(non-3GPP)接入技术连接，例如蓝牙(Bluetooth)接入技术、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks，WLAN)接入技术等。
其中，如果eRemote UE不经过eRelay UE而直接与基站通信，那么eRemote UE与基站之间的路径称为蜂窝路径或直连路径，eRemote UE与基站之间的链路称为蜂窝链路或直连链路或Uu链路，如果eRemote UE经过eRelay UE与基站通信，那么eRemote UE与基站之间的路径称为非直连路径或中继路径，eRemote UE与基站之间的链路称为非直连链路或中继链路。
2)网络设备，例如包括基站(例如，接入点)，可以是指接入网中在空中接口上通过一个或多个扇区与无线终端设备通信的设备。基站可用于将收到的空中帧与IP分组进行相互转换，作为用户设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。基站还可协调对空中接口的属性管理。例如，基站可以包括LTE系统或演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，或者也可以包括5G系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，NG-NB)，本发明实施例并不限定。
3)本发明实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“多个”是指两个或两个以上，鉴于此，本发明实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，字符“/”，如无特殊说明，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
下面首先介绍本发明实施例的技术背景。
目前，一个用户设备与基站间的连接模式可以有两种。
连接模式一、用户设备直接与基站连接以进行通信，该方式可以称为直连通信方式。
连接模式二：一个用户设备通过另外一个用户设备与基站连接以进行通信，该方式可以称为非直连通信方式。此时，前者为Remote UE，可称为远端用户设备或远端设备，用于连接基站和远端设备的终端设备为Relay UE，可称为中继用户设备或中继设备。
其中，Remote UE通过Relay UE与基站连接的接入网侧的网络架构请参见图1。在图1中可以看到，基站与中继设备之间可建立上行链路和下行链路，一个中继设备可连接多个远端设备，图1中以两个远端设备为例，中继设备与远端设备之间的链路可称为中继链路或侧行链路。
Remote UE可以在两种连接模式或者通信路径间进行转换。例如，当一个UE与基站间的链路质量比较差时，该UE可以作为Remote UE，选择通过一个附近的Relay UE与基站进行连接，这时需要进行从直连通信方式到非直连通信方式的转换，即要从Uu链路转换为中继链路，请参见图2A。再例如，当 Remote UE连接的Relay UE移动后，Remote UE和Relay UE之间的连接可能无法再维持，此时，需要进行从非直连通信方式到直连通信方式的转换，即要从中继链路转换为Uu链路，请参见图2B。
在Rel-13中，标准化的Relay UE是通过IP层，即Layer 3，对Remote UE和基站之间的数据进行转发的，下面介绍在Layer 3Relay架构中Remote UE从蜂窝链路到中继链路的路径转换过程，请参见图3。其中，Remote UE的基站和Relay UE的基站可以是同一个基站，也可以是不同的基站，对方案本身没有影响，图3是以二者是同一个基站为例。
首先，Remote UE通过Uu接口直接与基站连接，通过直连通信方式进行数据通信。
S301、Remote UE确定Uu链路的信道质量低于基站配置的门限，则Remote UE触发路径转换过程。首先，Remote UE触发Relay UE的发现过程。这个过程也可以视为Remote UE和Relay UE彼此发现的过程。
例如，Remote UE发送广播消息，那么接收该广播消息的Relay UE可以向Remote UE回复响应，则Remote UE就确定发现了Relay UE。或者，Relay UE主动发送广播消息，那么Remote UE如果接收了该广播消息，就确定发现了该Relay UE。
S302、若Remote UE发现了一个或者多个满足条件的Relay UE，则Remote UE从中选择一个Relay UE。
S303、Remote UE开始与所选择的Relay UE之间建立连接，首先Remote UE向基站发送侧行链路用户设备信息(Sidelink UE Information)消息，该消息用于通知基站，Remote UE需要与Relay UE进行通信，并向基站请求与Relay UE进行通信的资源。则基站接收该Sidelink UE Information消息。
S304、基站向Remote UE发送无线资源控制连接重配置(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)消息，以给Remote UE配置Remote UE与Relay UE通信所采用的资源分配方式。则Remote UE接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。
其中，如果基站为Remote UE配置的是用户设备自主资源选择(UE autonomous resource selection)的资源分配方式，则基站在RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中会同时携带为Remote UE分配的资源池。
S305、Remote UE按照RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中的内容进行配置，此后，Remote UE向基站发送无线资源控制连接重配置完成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)消息。则基站接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete消息。
S306、Remote UE在基站分配的资源池中或者在基站调度的资源上向Relay UE发送直接通信请求(DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST)消息。则Relay UE在基站分配的资源池中或者在基站调度的资源上接收该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息。
S307、Relay UE收到Remote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息，以通知基站Relay UE需要与Remote UE进行通信，并向基站请求与Remote UE进行通信的资源。则基站接收该Sidelink UE Information消息。
其中，Relay UE收到Remote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，如果Relay UE此时处于无线资源控制空闲(RRC_IDLE)状态，则Relay UE首先通过无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)连接建立过程进入RRC连接(RRC_CONNECTED)状态。此后，Relay UE再向基站发送SidelinkUEInformation消息。
S308、基站向Relay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息，以给Relay UE配置Relay UE与Remote UE通信所采用的资源分配方式。则Relay UE接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。
其中，如果基站为Relay UE配置的是UE autonomous resource selection的资源分配方式，则基 站在该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中会携带为Relay UE分配的资源池。
S309、Relay UE按照RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中的内容进行配置，此后，Relay UE向基站发送RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete消息。则基站接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete消息。
S310、Relay UE在基站分配的资源池中或者在基站调度的资源上向Remote UE发送直接通信接纳(DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT)消息。则Remote UE接收该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息。
S311、Remote UE收到Relay UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息后，由Remote UE的应用层决定何时将通信路径从Uu链路(link)转到Relay link，即从直连通信路径转换为非直连通信路径。
可以看到，按照图3所示的方案，eRemote UE如果要进行路径转换，例如要从与基站之间的直连路径转换为通过eRelay UE与基站通信的非直连路径，还是会由eRemote UE的应用层自己决定何时将数据通信从蜂窝链路转换到中继链路，无法保证路径转换前后业务的连续性。
鉴于此，本发明实施例中，如果第一用户设备请求进行路径转换，那么网络设备会向第一用户设备发送第二消息，指示第一用户设备将通信路径由直连路径转换为非直连路径，也就是由网络设备来指示第一用户设备何时进行路径转换，而不是由第一用户设备自行确定何时进行转换，那么网络设备就可以根据业务进行调度，从而尽量保证第一用户设备在路径转换前后的业务的连续性。
下面结合附图介绍本发明实施例所提供的技术方案。在本发明实施例中，采用的是Layer 2UE-to-NW Relay的网络中继方式。在下文的介绍过程中，均以第一用户设备是eRemote UE、第二用户设备是eRelay UE、网络设备是基站为例，在实际应用中当然不限于此。
请参见图4，本发明一实施例提供一种通信路径转换方法，在本发明实施例中，直连路径中的基站与非直连路径中的基站为同一个基站。该方法的过程描述如下。
初始时，eRemote UE直接与基站连接，通过直连路径与基站进行数据通信。
S401、当eRemote UE满足eRelay UE发现过程的触发条件后，eRemote UE触发发现eRelay UE。其中，触发条件由基站配置，或者由eRemote UE自主触发。
S402、eRemote UE进入eRelay UE的发现过程，通过该发现过程来发现周围的eRelay UE。
S403、当eRemote UE发现一个或者多个满足条件的eRelay UE后，eRemote UE从满足条件的eRelay UE中选择一个eRelay UE。
S404、eRemote UE在选择一个eRelay UE后，eRemote UE与该eRelay UE建立通信连接，这里的通信连接是eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的短距离链路的连接。eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的短距离链路连接技术包括但不限于LTE Sidelink技术，WLAN技术或蓝牙技术。
其中，当eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的短距离链路连接技术为LTE Sidelink技术时，eRemote UE在与eRelay UE建立通信连接之前，要先向基站请求资源，在得到基站分配的资源后，eRemote UE再与eRelay UE建立通信连接。
另外，在此过程中，如果eRelay UE的初始状态处于RRC_IDLE状态，则eRelay UE首先通过RRC连接建立过程进入RRC_CONNECTED状态，之后再与eRemote UE建立通信连接。
其中，S401-S404都是可选的步骤，为了与必选的步骤相区分，在图4中将这几个步骤画为虚线。
S405、在成功与选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接后，eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，该第一消息用于向基站请求进行通信路径转换，即请求将eRemote UE与基站之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过eRelay UE与基站通信的非直连路径。则基站接收该第一消息。其中，路径转换之前的基站，即直连路径中的基站，与路径转换之后的基站，即非直连路径中的基站，可能是同一个基站，也可能是不同 的基站，本发明实施例是以二者是同一个基站为例。该第一消息例如为RRC消息，该RRC消息携带如下信息中的至少一种：
路径转换类型：从蜂窝路径到中继路径的路径转换；
eRemote UE选择并建立通信连接的eRelay UE的标识；
eRemote UE选择并建立通信连接的eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识；
eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的短距离通信技术：例如为LTE Sidelink，或蓝牙，或WLAN，等等。
S406、基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息，该第四消息携带第三承载配置信息以及eRemote UE的标识，另外，第四消息还携带第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，第二指示信息用于通知eRelay UE为eRemote UE提供非直连路径支持，第二承载配置信息和第三承载配置信息用于eRelay UE配置无线承载。则eRelay UE接收该第四消息。该第四消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息，通过该RRC连接重配置消息为eRelay UE配置用来承载eRemote UE的控制信令和用户面数据的无线承载。
其中，第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第三承载配置信息包括：至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。如上是以至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系包含在第二承载配置信息中为例，或者，至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系也可以包含在第三承载配置信息中，而不是包含在第二承载配置信息中。
第三无线承载为用于在eRelay UE和eRemote UE之间的通信链路传输eRemote UE的数据和信令的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于在eRelay UE和基站之间的通信链路传输eRemote UE的数据和信令的无线承载。
其中，基站接收第一消息后，根据第一消息中包含的eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，确定eRelay UE的服务小区属于本基站还是属于相邻的其他基站，本发明实施例中以eRelay UE的服务小区是属于本基站的小区为例。则基站根据第一消息中包含的eRelay UE的标识，确定eRemote UE连接的eRelay UE是哪一个UE。如果基站允许该eRemote UE进行通信路径转换，则基站向eRelay UE发送该RRC连接重配置消息。
S407、eRelay UE根据第四消息配置相应的无线承载。在完成RRC连接重配置后，eRelay UE向基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息，则基站接收该RRC连接重配置完成消息。
其中，eRelay UE根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及eRemote UE的标识，配置与eRemote UE间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据eRemote UE的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在eRelay UE和基站间的通信链路上传输eRemote UE的数据和信令的无线承载。
具体的，如果第四消息中包含第二指示信息，则eRelay UE使能用于处理eRemote UE与基站之间传递的数据的适配层，例如将其称为第一适配层。如果第四消息中包含第二承载配置信息，则eRelay UE建立至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。另外，eRelay UE根据第四消息携带的第三承载配置信息重新建立至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道，以及使能处理第四无线承载传输的数据的适配层，例如将其称为第二适配层。或eRelay UE根据第四消息携带的第三承载配置信息重新配置至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道，以及使能处理第四无线承载传输的数据的第二适配层。
S408、如果基站允许eRemote UE进行通信路径转换，则基站向eRemote UE发送第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知eRemote UE进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种，其中第二指示信息用于通知eRemote UE进行通信路径转换，第一承载配置信息包括eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或eRemote UE和基站之间的PDCP层的配置信息。则eRemote UE 接收该第二消息，该第二消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息。
具体的，第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第一无线承载为用于eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的通信链路的无线承载，第二无线承载为用于eRemote UE和基站之间的通信链路的无线承载。
S409、eRemote UE根据第二消息配置相应的无线承载，在完成RRC连接重配置后，通过eRelay UE向基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息，则基站接收该RRC连接重配置完成消息，且eRemote UE停止与基站间通过直连路径的数据传输，即断开与基站之间的直连路径。之后，eRemote UE开始通过eRelay UE来和基站之间进行数据传输。
其中，若第二消息中包含第一指示信息，则eRemote UE使能用于处理通过eRelay UE与基站间传递的数据的适配层，例如将其称为第三适配层。若第二消息中包含第一承载配置信息，则eRemote UE根据第一承载配置信息重新配置第一无线承载的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。
其中，S406-S409之间的执行顺序可以任意，不受图4中给出的顺序的限定。
在S405中介绍了，第一消息可以携带eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，那么，如果eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间通过3GPP技术进行通信连接，那么关于eRemote UE获得eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，包括但不限于以下几种方法：
1、eRemote UE在与eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程中获取eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识。具体如下：
eRemote UE在发送给eRelay UE的连接建立请求消息中，携带用于请求eRelay UE发送其服务小区的小区标识的指示信息。那么，eRelay UE在收到eRemote UE的连接建立请求消息后，在回复给eRemote UE的连接请求接纳消息中，携带自己的服务小区的小区标识。该服务小区的小区标识可以直接包含在连接接纳请求消息中，也可在承载该连接接纳请求消息的媒体访问控制(Media Access Control，MAC)协议数据单元(Protocol Data Unit，)PDU中作为一个MAC控制元素(Control Element，CE)来传输。
2、eRelay UE主动发送自己的服务小区的小区标识信息。具体如下：
eRelay UE在回复给eRemote UE的连接请求接纳消息中，主动包含自己所在的服务小区的小区标识。同样的，该服务小区的小区标识可以直接包含在连接接纳请求消息中，也可在承载该连接接纳请求消息MAC PDU中作为一个MAC CE来传输。
如果eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间通过非3GPP技术进行通信连接，那么关于eRemote UE获得eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，包括但不限于以下方法：
eRemote UE发送请求消息给eRelay UE。该请求消息的作用是请求eRelay UE为其提供Layer 2UE-to-NW Relay支持，或者说是请求eRelay UE通过Layer 2为其转发与基站之间的业务数据。如果eRelay UE同意该请求消息的请求，则eRelay UE给eRemote UE回复接纳请求消息，以通知eRemote UE，eRelay UE已接纳eRemote UE的请求，并且在该接纳请求消息中包含eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识。其中，eRemote UE发送的请求消息和eRelay UE回复的接纳请求消息可以为RRC消息。其中，如果eRelay UE在收到eRemote UE发送的该请求消息时处于RRC_IDLE状态，则eRelay UE首先建立RRC连接，转入RRC_CONNECTED状态，之后再向eRemote UE回复接纳请求消息。
在本发明实施例中，小区标识可以包括小区的物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identity，PCI)，或者包括能够在一个公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network，PLMN)中唯一识别小区的小区标识(Cell Identity)，或者包括小区全球唯一的小区标识(Cell global identity，CGI)。
另外，eRemote UE在向基站发送第一消息后，基站有可能拒绝该eRemote UE的路径转换请求。那 么，因为eRemote UE事先已与eRelay UE建立了通信连接，如果基站拒绝该eRemote UE的路径转换请求，则eRemote UE需要知道基站的决定，以便及时释放与eRelay UE之间的通信连接。本发明实施例中，在基站拒绝eRemote UE的路径转换请求的情况下，包括但不限于通过以下几种方案让eRemote UE释放与eRelay UE之间的通信连接：
1、方案一。
如果基站拒绝eRemote UE进行通信路径转换，则基站向eRemote UE发送RRC消息，该RRC消息包含拒绝eRemote UE进行路径转换的指示信息。那么eRemote UE根据该RRC消息所携带的指示信息就知道基站拒绝了路径转换请求，从而eRemote UE可以触发与eRelay UE之间的通信连接的释放过程。
2、方案二。
基站为eRemote UE配置一个时长。eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息后，启动计时器，该计时器的计时时长为基站所配置的时长。在计时器运行期间，如果eRemote UE收到了第二消息，则停止运行该计时器。而在该计时器超时时，如果eRemote UE还未收到第二消息，则eRemote UE确定基站拒绝了路径转换请求，eRemote UE触发与eRelay UE之间的通信连接的释放过程。
3、方案三。
eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息后，启动计时器，该计时器的计时时长由eRemote UE自行确定，例如eRemote UE可根据经验来确定。在计时器运行期间，如果eRemote UE收到了第二消息，则停止运行该计时器。而在该计时器超时时，如果eRemote UE还未收到第二消息，则eRemote UE确定基站拒绝了路径转换请求，eRemote UE触发与eRelay UE之间的通信连接的释放过程。
请参见图5，本发明一实施例提供一种通信路径转换方法，在本发明实施例中，直连路径中的基站与非直连路径中的基站为不同的基站。该方法的过程描述如下。
初始时，eRemote UE直接与基站连接，通过直连路径与基站进行数据通信。
其中，本发明实施例中的S501-S505可参考图4所示的实施例中的S401-S405，对于相同的步骤不多赘述，下面主要介绍与图4所示的实施例中不同的步骤。S501-S505中的第一基站即为图4所示的实施例中的基站。
S506、第一基站向第二基站发送第六消息，该第六消息用于请求将eRemote UE从第一基站切换到第二基站，该第六消息中包括第一消息中携带的所有信息。该第六消息例如为切换请求消息。则第二基站接收该第六消息。
其中，基站接收第一消息后，根据第一消息中包含的eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，确定eRelay UE的服务小区属于本基站还是属于相邻的其他基站，本发明实施例中以eRelay UE的服务小区是属于其他基站的小区为例，将该其他基站称为第二基站，则本基站称为第一基站。那么，第一基站发送第六消息给eRelay UE的服务基站，即第二基站。该第六消息中包含eRemote UE在第一消息中携带的所有信息。此外，第一基站还可以在第六消息中通知第二基站，本次切换的原因是eRemote UE需要进行从直连通信路径到非直连通信路径的通信路径转换。
S507、第二基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息，该第四消息携带第三承载配置信息以及eRemote UE的标识，另外，第四消息还携带第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，第二指示信息用于通知eRelay UE为eRemote UE提供非直连路径支持，第二承载配置信息和第三承载配置信息用于eRelay UE配置无线承载。则eRelay UE接收该第四消息。该第四消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息，通过该RRC连接重配置消息为eRelay UE配置用来承载eRemote UE的控制信令和用户面数据的无线承载。
其中，第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。第三承载配置信息包括：至少一个第四 无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置。如上是以至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系包含在第二承载配置信息中为例，或者，至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系也可以包含在第三承载配置信息中，而不是包含在第二承载配置信息中。
第三无线承载为用于在eRelay UE和eRemote UE之间的通信链路传输eRemote UE的数据和信令的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于在eRelay UE和基站之间的通信链路传输eRemote UE的数据和信令的无线承载。
其中，第二基站收到第一基站发送的切换请求消息后，根据该切换请求消息携带的eRelay UE的标识，确定eRemote UE连接的eRelay UE是哪一个UE。如果第二基站允许该eRemote UE进行通信路径切换并且通过eRelay UE与第二基站进行非直连方式通信，则第二基站向该eRelay UE发送第四消息，通过第四消息为eRelay UE配置用来承载eRemote UE的控制信令和用户面数据的无线承载。该第四消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息。
S508、eRelay UE根据第四消息配置相应的无线承载。在完成RRC连接重配置后，eRelay UE向第二基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息，则第二基站接收该RRC连接重配置完成消息。
其中，eRelay UE根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及eRemote UE的标识，配置与eRemote UE间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据eRemote UE的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在eRelay UE和基站间的通信链路上传输eRemote UE的数据和信令的无线承载。
具体的，关于eRelay UE究竟如何进行配置，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S407的描述，不多赘述。
S509、第二基站收到eRelay UE返回的RRC连接重配完成消息后，向第一基站发送第七消息。则第一基站接收第七消息。该第七消息携带第一承载配置信息，即携带eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或eRemote UE和基站间的PDCP层的配置信息。该第七消息例如为切换确认消息。
其中，S506、S509都是可选的步骤，为了与必选的步骤相区分，在图5中将这两个步骤画为虚线。
S510、第一基站接收第二基站发送的第七消息后，向eRemote UE发送第二消息，第二消息用于通知eRemote UE进行通信路径转换。在第二消息中包含第七消息携带的信息。该第二消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息。
S511、eRemote UE接收第二消息后，根据第二消息配置相应的无线承载，在完成RRC连接重配置后，通过eRelay UE向第二基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息，则第二基站接收该RRC连接重配置完成消息，且eRemote UE停止与第一基站间通过直连路径的数据传输，即断开与基站之间的直连路径。之后，eRemote UE开始通过eRelay UE来和第二基站之间进行数据传输。
其中，若第二消息中包含第一指示信息，则eRemote UE使能用于处理通过eRelay UE与基站间传递的数据的第三适配层。若第二消息中包含第一承载配置信息，则eRemote UE根据第一承载配置信息重新配置第一无线承载的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。关于第一承载配置信息包含的内容，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S408的介绍，不多赘述。
其中，S506-S511之间的执行顺序可以任意，不受图5中给出的顺序的限定。
关于eRemote UE获得eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识的方式，可参考图4所示的实施例中的介绍。
eRemote UE在向基站发送第一消息后，基站有可能拒绝该eRemote UE的路径转换请求，则eRemote UE需要知道基站的决定，以便及时释放与eRelay UE之间的通信连接。关于eRemote UE如何知道基站的决定从而释放与eRelay UE之间的通信连接，可参考图4所示的实施例中的相关介绍，不多赘述。
请参见图6，本发明一实施例提供一种通信路径转换方法。在图4所示的实施例以及图5所示的实施例中，eRemote UE都是先与eRelay UE建立通信连接之后再向基站发送第一消息，而本发明实施例中，eRemote UE是先向基站发送第一消息，之后再与eRelay UE建立通信连接。且本发明实施例中，直连路径中的基站与非直连路径中的基站为同一个基站。该方法的过程描述如下。
初始时，eRemote UE直接与基站连接，通过直连路径与基站进行数据通信。
其中，本发明实施例中的S601-S603可参考图4所示的实施例中的S401-S403，对于相同的步骤不多赘述，下面主要介绍与图4所示的实施例中不同的步骤。
S604、在选择一个eRelay UE后，eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，该第一消息用于向基站请求进行通信路径转换，即请求将eRemote UE与基站之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过eRelay UE与基站通信的非直连路径。该第一消息例如为RRC消息，该RRC消息携带的信息可参考图4所示的实施例中的S405中的描述。
其中，因为在本发明实施例中eRemote UE与eRelay UE尚未建立通信连接，因此eRemote UE可能无法通过与eRelay UE之间的通信连接获得eRelay UE的标识。则，如果eRemote UE事先并不知晓eRelay UE的标识，那么第一消息中就无法携带eRelay UE的标识，如果eRemote UE事先知晓eRelay UE的标识，那么第一消息中就可以选择携带eRelay UE的标识。
S605、基站向eRemote UE发送第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知eRemote UE进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种，其中第二指示信息用于通知eRemote UE进行通信路径转换，第一承载配置信息包括eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或eRemote UE和基站之间的PDCP层的配置信息。则eRemote UE接收该第二消息，该第二消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息。
其中，基站接收第一消息后，根据第一消息中包含的eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，确定eRelay UE的服务小区属于本基站还是属于相邻的其他基站，本发明实施例中以eRelay UE的服务小区是属于本基站的小区为例。那么，如果基站允许该eRemote UE进行通信路径转换，则基站向该eRemote UE发送第二消息。
S606、eRemote UE接收第二消息后，首先与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接。另外，eRemote UE还根据第二消息配置相应的无线承载。
S607、eRelay UE向基站发送RRC消息，该RRC消息用于通知基站，该eRelay UE可以做为该eRemote UE的中继UE。则基站接收该RRC消息。
其中，在与eRemote UE建立通信连接时，如果eRelay UE处于RRC_IDLE状态，则eRelay UE首先发起RRC连接建立过程，转入RRC_CONNCTED状态。在RRC_CONNCTED状态下，eRelay UE向基站发送RRC消息。当然，如果在与eRemote UE建立通信连接时，eRelay UE已处于RRC_CONNCTED状态，则eRelay UE可直接向基站发送RRC消息。该RRC消息中包含如下信息中的至少一种：
该eRelay UE可以为之做为中继UE的eRemote UE的标识；
eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的短距离通信技术：例如为LTE Sidelink，或蓝牙，或WLAN，等等。
S608、基站接收该RRC消息后，向eRelay UE发送第四消息，该第四消息携带第三承载配置信息以及eRemote UE的标识，另外，第四消息还携带第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，第二指示信息用于通知eRelay UE为eRemote UE提供非直连路径支持，第二承载配置信息和第三承载配置信息用于eRelay UE配置无线承载。则eRelay UE接收该第四消息。该第四消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息，通过该RRC连接重配置消息为eRelay UE配置用来承载eRemote UE的控制信令和用户面数据的无线承载。
关于第二承载配置信息以及第三承载配置信息等内容的介绍，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S406 的相关描述。
S609、eRelay UE根据第四消息配置相应的无线承载。在完成RRC连接重配置后，eRelay UE向基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息，则基站接收该RRC连接重配置完成消息。
关于eRelay UE如何配置无线承载，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S407的相关描述。
S610、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送第九消息，该第九消息用于通知eRemote UE，eRelay UE可以开始为之转发eRemote UE与基站间的业务数据。该第九消息可以是S606中eRemote UE与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接过程中的消息，也可以为单独的一条消息。
其中，S606、S607、及S610都是可选的步骤，为了与必选的步骤相区分，在图6中将这几个步骤画为虚线。
S611、eRemote UE在确认eRelay UE可以为其转发与基站间的业务数据后，停止与基站间通过直连路径的数据传输，即断开与基站之间的直连路径。且，eRemote UE通过eRelay UE向基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。之后，eRemote UE开始通过eRelay UE来和基站之间进行数据传输。
在S604中介绍了，第一消息可以携带eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，那么，如果eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间通过3GPP技术进行通信连接，关于eRemote UE获得eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，包括但不限于以下几种方法：
1、eRelay UE在发送的针对Sidelink的主信息块(Master Information Block，MIB)消息中包含eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识。
2、eRelay UE在向eRemote UE发送的发现消息中包含eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识。该发现消息可以为发现宣告消息，或发现响应消息。
如果eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间通过非3GPP技术进行通信连接，则关于eRemote UE获得eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识的方式，可参考图4所示的实施例中的介绍。
在采用本发明实施例所提供的方案的情况下，如果S606中eRemote UE与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程失败，需要考虑的一个问题是，eRemote UE如何处理与eRelay间的链路的无线承载配置。对此，本发明实施例提供以下解决方法：
1、eRemote UE接收基站发送的第二消息后，直到与eRelay UE建立连接后才应用与eRelay间的链路的无线承载配置。
2、eRemote UE接收第二消息后，立刻应用与eRelay间的链路的无线承载配置。当eRemote UE判断与eRelay UE的通信连接建立失败后，则eRemote UE释放该无线承载配置。
以上两种方法可根据实际情况选用，且实际应用中的解决方法不限于以上两种。
在如上介绍的本发明实施例提供的实施方式中，eRemote UE是在S611中断开与基站之间的直连路径。作为该实施方式的另一种可替换的实施方式，eRemote UE可以在接收第二消息后，即断开与基站之间的直连路径。在采用这种实施方式的情况下，如果S606中eRemote UE与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程失败，那么eRemote UE可以选择触发RRC连接重建过程。具体来说，当eRemote UE收到eRelay UE的连接建立拒绝消息后，eRemote UE触发RRC连接重建过程。或者，当eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送连接建立请求消息超过预设时长后未接收到eRelay UE的响应消息，则eRemote UE触发RRC连接重建过程。其中，该预设时长可以是基站事先配置的，或者可以是eRemote UE根据经验设置的。
请参见图7，本发明一实施例提供一种通信路径转换方法。在本发明实施例中，eRemote UE也是先向基站发送第一消息，之后再与eRelay UE建立通信连接。且本发明实施例中，直连路径中的基站与非直连路径中的基站为不同的基站。该方法的过程描述如下。
初始时，eRemote UE直接与基站连接，通过直连路径与基站进行数据通信。
其中，本发明实施例中的S701-S704可参考图6所示的实施例中的S601-S604，对于相同的步骤不多赘述，下面主要介绍与图6所示的实施例中不同的步骤。
S705、第一基站向第二基站发送第六消息，该第六消息用于请求将eRemote UE从第一基站切换到第二基站，该第六消息中包括第一消息中携带的所有信息。该第六消息例如为切换请求消息。则第二基站接收该第六消息。
其中，第一基站接收第一消息后，根据第一消息中包含的eRelay UE的服务小区的小区标识，确定eRelay UE的服务小区属于本基站还是属于相邻的其他基站，本发明实施例中以eRelay UE的服务小区是属于其他基站的小区为例，将该其他基站称为第二基站，则本基站称为第一基站。那么，第一基站发送第六消息给eRelay UE的服务基站，即第二基站。该第六消息中包含eRemote UE在第一消息中携带的所有信息。此外，第一基站还可以在第六消息中通知第二基站，本次切换的原因是eRemote UE需要进行从直连通信路径到非直连通信路径的通信路径转换。
S706、第二基站向第一基站发送第七消息，则第一基站接收第七消息。该第七消息携带第一承载配置信息，即携带eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或eRemote UE和基站间的PDCP层的配置信息。该第七消息例如为切换确认消息。第七消息携带第六消息包括的信息。
其中，第二基站接收第六消息后，如果第二基站允许eRemote UE进行通信路径转换并且通过eRelay UE与第二基站进行非直连方式通信，则第二基站向第一基站发送第七消息。
S707、第一基站接收第七消息后，向eRemote UE发送第二消息，第二消息用于通知eRemote UE进行通信路径转换。在第二消息中包含第七消息携带的信息。该第二消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息。
S708、eRemote UE接收第二消息后，与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接。另外，eRemote UE还根据第二消息配置相应的无线承载。
S709、eRelay UE向第二基站发送RRC消息，该RRC消息用于通知第二基站，该eRelay UE可以做为该eRemote UE的中继UE。则第二基站接收该RRC消息。
其中，在与eRemote UE建立通信连接时，如果eRelay UE处于RRC_IDLE状态，则eRelay UE首先发起RRC连接建立过程，转入RRC_CONNCTED状态。在RRC_CONNCTED状态下，eRelay UE向第二基站发送RRC消息。当然，如果在与eRemote UE建立通信连接时，eRelay UE已处于RRC_CONNCTED状态，则eRelay UE可直接向第二基站发送RRC消息。该RRC消息中包含如下信息中的至少一种：
该eRelay UE可以为之做为中继UE的eRemote UE的标识；
eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的短距离通信技术：例如为LTE Sidelink，或蓝牙，或WLAN，等等。
S710、第二基站接收该RRC消息后，向eRelay UE发送第四消息。关于第四消息携带的内容等，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S406的相关描述。
S711、eRelay UE根据第四消息配置相应的无线承载。在完成RRC连接重配置后，eRelay UE向第二基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息，则第二基站接收该RRC连接重配置完成消息。
关于eRelay UE如何配置无线承载，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S407的相关描述。
S712、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送第九消息，该第九消息用于通知eRemote UE，eRelay UE可以开始为之转发eRemote UE与基站间的业务数据。该第九消息可以是S708中eRemote UE与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接过程中的消息，也可以为单独的一条消息。
其中，S705、S706、S708、S709、及S712都是可选的步骤，为了与必选的步骤相区分，在图7中将这几个步骤画为虚线。
S713、eRemote UE在确认eRelay UE可以为其转发与第二基站间的业务数据后，停止与第一基站 间通过直连路径的数据传输，即断开与第一基站之间的直连路径。且，eRemote UE通过eRelay UE向第二基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息。之后，eRemote UE开始通过eRelay UE来和第二基站之间进行数据传输。
在采用本发明实施例所提供的方案的情况下，如果S708中eRemote UE与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程失败，那么对于eRemote UE与eRelay间的链路的无线承载配置的处理方式可参考图6所示的实施例中的相关介绍。
在如上介绍的本发明实施例提供的实施方式中，eRemote UE是在S713中断开与基站之间的直连路径。作为该实施方式的另一种可替换的实施方式，eRemote UE可以在接收第二消息后，即断开与第一基站之间的直连路径。在采用这种实施方式的情况下，如果S708中eRemote UE与其选择的eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程失败，那么eRemote UE同样可以选择触发RRC连接重建过程，关于这部分内容的介绍可参考图6所示的实施例。
在本发明实施例如上提供的实施方式中，可以认为eRemote UE是通过eRelay UE接入了第二基站，那么作为这种实施方式的一种可替换的实施方式，eRemote UE可以先接入第二基站，再转换为非直连通信路径。即，将如前介绍的
可选的，另外一种实现方式为：将上述的S706和S707替换为如下的S714-S718，其中，S714-S718作为可替换的实现方式，在图7中并未画出。
S714、第二基站向第一基站发送第七消息，则第一基站接收第七消息。该第七消息为携带切换命令的切换确认消息。
其中，第二基站接收第六消息后，如果第二基站允许eRemote UE进行通信路径转换并且通过eRelay UE与第二基站进行非直连方式通信，则第二基站向第一基站发送第七消息。
S715、第一基站接收第七消息后，向eRemote UE发送第八消息，第八消息用于通知eRemote UE进行切换。在第八消息中包含第七消息携带的切换命令。该第八消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息。
S716、eRemote UE执行正常的切换过程。即，eRemote UE通过随机接入过程，完成到第二基站的切换。
S717、eRemote UE向第二基站发送RRC连接重配置完成消息，则第二基站接收该RRC连接重配置完成消息。
S718、第二基站接收该RRC连接重配完成消息后，向eRemote UE发送第二消息。第二消息用于通知eRemote UE进行通信路径转换。在第二消息中包含第一承载配置信息，即携带eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或eRemote UE和基站间的PDCP层的配置信息。该第二消息例如为RRC连接重配置消息。
下面请参见图8，本发明一实施例介绍eRemote UE和eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程，本发明实施例中的通信连接为3GPP技术下的通信连接，例如为sidelink连接。
首先，eRemote UE通过Uu接口直接与基站连接，通过直连通信方式进行数据通信。
如果eRemote UE确定Uu链路的信道质量低于基站配置的门限，则eRemote UE触发eRelay UE的发现过程。这个过程也可以视为eRemote UE和eRelay UE彼此发现的过程。例如，eRemote UE发送广播消息，那么接收该广播消息的eRelay UE可以向eRemote UE回复响应，则eRemote UE就确定发现了eRelay UE。或者，eRelay UE主动发送广播消息，那么eRemote UE如果接收了该广播消息，就确定发现了该eRelay UE。
如果eRemote UE发现了一个或者多个满足条件的eRelay UE，则eRemote UE从中选择一个eRelay UE。如上即为图8中所示的eRelay UE的选择过程。下面介绍在eRelay UE选择结束后的过程。
S801、eRemote UE开始与所选择的Relay UE之间建立通信连接，首先eRemote UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息，该消息用于通知基站，eRemote UE需要与eRelay UE进行通信，并向基站请求与eRelay UE进行通信的资源。则基站接收该Sidelink UE Information消息。其中，该Sidelink UE Information消息中携带如下两个指示信息中的至少一个：
eRemote UE请求的为用于与eRelay UE通过Layer 2Relay UE方式进行通信的资源；
eRemote UE请求的资源的应用场景，例如是用于商业(Commerical)应用的通信还是用于公共安全(Public Safety)应用的通信。
其中，应用场景不同，则基站可能会为eRemote UE分配不同的资源。
S802、基站向eRemote UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息，以给eRemote UE配置eRemote UE与eRelay UE通信所采用的资源分配方式。则eRemote UE接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。
其中，如果基站为eRemote UE配置的是UE autonomous resource selection的资源分配方式，则基站在RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中会同时携带为eRemote UE分配的资源池。
S803、eRemote UE按照RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中的内容进行配置，此后，eRemote UE向基站发送RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete消息。则基站接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete消息。
S804、eRemote UE在基站分配的资源池中或者在基站调度的资源上向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息。则eRelay UE在基站分配的资源池中接收该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息。
S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息，以通知基站eRelay UE需要与eRemote UE进行通信，并向基站请求与eRemote UE进行通信的资源。则基站接收该Sidelink UE Information消息。其中，该Sidelink UE Information消息中携带如下两个指示信息中的至少一个：
eRelay UE请求的为用于与eRemote UE通过Layer 2Relay UE方式进行通信的资源；
eRelay UE请求的资源的应用场景，例如是用于Commerical应用的通信还是用于Public Safety应用的通信。
其中，eRelay UE收到eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，如果eRelay UE此时处于RRC_IDLE状态，则eRelay UE首先通过RRC连接建立过程进入RRC_CONNECTED状态。此后，eRelay UE再向基站发送SidelinkUEInformation消息。
S806、基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息，以给eRelay UE配置eRelay UE与eRemote UE通信所采用的资源分配方式。则eRelay UE接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。
其中，如果基站为eRelay UE配置的是UE autonomous resource selection的资源分配方式，则基站在该eRRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中会携带为eRelay UE分配的资源池。
S807、eRelay UE按照RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中的内容进行配置，且eRelay UE在基站分配的资源池中或者在基站调度的资源上向eRemote UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息。则eRemote UE接收该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息。
S808、eRemote UE收到eRelay UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息后，则eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。
S809、基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息，该第四消息携带第三承载配置信息以及eRemote UE的标 识，另外，第四消息还携带第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，则eRelay UE接收该第四消息。
关于S808和S809的细节内容，可参考图4所示的实施例或图5所示的实施例中的相关描述。另外，对于S809之后的步骤，也可参考图4所示的实施例或图5所示的实施例。
其中，当eRelay UE的基站和eRemote UE的基站不是同一个基站时，eRemote UE的基站在发送给eRelay UE的基站的第六消息中包含S808中的eRemote UE发送的第一消息中携带的信息。
本发明实施例中，因为是由Adaptation层来进行数据转发，不通过IP层，那么基站就无法通过IP地址来确定eRemote UE和eRelay UE，因此，在eRemote UE和eRelay UE建立Sidelink连接后，基站需要获取并保存eRemote UE的标识和eRelay UE的标识之间的对应关系，从而基站可以为相应的eRemote UE和eRelay UE配置无线承载，以及基站在需要向eRemote UE或eRelay UE发送下行数据时，根据标识就可以确定eRemote UE或eRelay UE。基于图8所示的eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的Sidelink的连接建立过程，基站获取eRemote UE的标识和eRelay UE的标识，包括但不限于以下几种实现方式：
1、实现方式一。
细化的S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个能够在该eRelay UE下唯一识别该eRemote UE的标识，该标识称为第一标识，或者称为eRemote UE的本地身份识别号(Local ID)。eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息，在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，可携带eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以携带向该eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。从而基站就获得了eRemote UE的标识，即Local ID。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，在该第一消息中，包含与eRemote UE建立了Sidelink连接的eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
那么，基站就可以通过eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID将eRelay UE的标识和eRemote UE的标识关联起来。
其中，eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID是用于eRelay UE和eRemote UE之间进行通信的，对于基站来说可以无需获知。本发明实施例只是利用Layer-2 ID来将eRelay UE的标识和eRemote UE的标识关联起来。
而且，在实现方式一种，基站获知的eRemote UE的标识，即Local ID，是eRelay UE分配的，相对于eRemote UE的小区无线网络临时识别(CellRadio Network Temmporary Identify，C-RNTI)来说，Local ID的长度较小，方便在消息中携带，有助于减小开销。
2、实现方式二。
细化的S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2ID和向eRelay UE该发送Direct_Connection_request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S806、接收eRelay UE发送的Sidelink UE Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息，以给eRelay UE配置eRelay UE与eRemote UE通信所采用的资源分配方式。则eRelay UE接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。
在该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了Sidelink连接的eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
3、实现方式三。
细化的S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2ID和向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了Sidelink连接的eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S809、基站接收第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息，例如为RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。则eRelay UE接收第四消息。
即，在实现方式一-实现方式三中，基站得到的eRemote UE的标识都是eRemote UE的Local ID，基站根据eRelay UE的标识和eRemote UE的Local ID就可以唯一确定一个eRemote UE。
4、实现方式四。
细化的S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S807、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息，在该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息中，可携带eRelay UE的标识。本发明实施例中，eRelay UE的标识例如为eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRelay UE的标识可以在承载DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含与eRemote UE建立了Sidelink连接的eRelay UE的C-RNTI。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
5、实现方式五：
细化的S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S806、接收eRelay UE发送的Sidelink UE Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息。在该RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S807、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息时，同时将eRelay UE的标识通知给eRemote UE。本发明实施例中，eRelay UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRelay UE的标识可以在承载DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含与eRemote UE建立了Sidelink连接的eRelay UE的C-RNTI。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
6、实现方式六。
细化的S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S807、eRelay UE在向eRemote UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息时，同时将eRelay  UE的标识通知给eRemote UE。本发明实施例中，eRelay UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRelay UE的标识可以在承载DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含与eRemote UE建立了Sidelink连接的eRelay UE的C-RNTI。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S809、基站接收eRemote UE发送的第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
即，在实现方式四-实现方式六中，基站得到的eRemote UE的标识都是eRemote UE的Local ID，基站根据eRelay UE的标识和eRemote UE的Local ID就可以唯一确定一个eRemote UE。基站得到的eRelay UE的标识都是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。
7、实现方式七。
细化的S804、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息，与该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在承载的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST下行的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S805、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的C-RNT。另外，在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，还可以包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
8、实现方式八。
细化的S804、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息，与该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在承载的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST下行的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S805、eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI。另外，在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，还包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S806、接收eRelay UE发送的Sidelink UE Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息。在该RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
9、实现方式九。
细化的S804、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息，与该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在承载的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST下行的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S805、eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI。另外，在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，还包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S809、基站接收eRemote UE发送的第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站 向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
10、实现方式十。
细化的S805、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
11、实现方式十一。
细化的S805、eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S806、接收eRelay UE发送的Sidelink UE Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息。在该RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
12、实现方式十二。
细化的S805、eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S808、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S809、基站接收eRemote UE发送的第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
需注意的是，如上的几种实现方式都未画在图8中。
请参见图9，本发明一实施例介绍eRemote UE和eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程，本发明实施例中的通信连接为3GPP技术下的通信连接，例如为sidelink连接。
首先，eRemote UE通过Uu接口直接与基站连接，通过直连通信方式进行数据通信。
如果eRemote UE确定Uu链路的信道质量低于基站配置的门限，则eRemote UE触发eRelay UE的发现过程。这个过程也可以视为eRemote UE和eRelay UE彼此发现的过程。例如，eRemote UE发送广播消息，那么接收该广播消息的eRelay UE可以向eRemote UE回复响应，则eRemote UE就确定发现了eRelay UE。或者，eRelay UE主动发送广播消息，那么eRemote UE如果接收了该广播消息，就确定发现了该eRelay UE。
如果eRemote UE发现了一个或者多个满足条件的eRelay UE，则eRemote UE从中选择一个eRelay UE。如上即为图9中所示的eRelay UE的选择过程。下面介绍在eRelay UE选择结束后的过程。
S901、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收第一消息。对于第一消息的介绍可参考如前的实施例。
另外，该第一消息中携带如下两个指示信息中的至少一个：
eRemote UE请求的为用于与eRelay UE通过Layer 2Relay UE方式进行通信的资源；
eRemote UE请求的资源的应用场景，例如是用于Commerical应用的通信还是用于Public Safety应用的通信。
S902、基站向eRemote UE发送第二消息，则eRemote UE接收第二消息。该第二消息例如为RRC  Connection Reconfiguration消息。对于第二消息的介绍可参考如前的实施例。
S903、eRemote UE在基站分配的资源池中或者在基站调度的资源上向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息。则eRelay UE在基站分配的资源池中接收该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息。
S904、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息，以通知基站eRelay UE需要与eRemote UE进行通信，并向基站请求与eRemote UE进行通信的资源。则基站接收该Sidelink UE Information消息。其中，该Sidelink UE Information消息中携带如下两个指示信息中的至少一个：
eRelay UE请求的为用于与eRemote UE通过Layer 2Relay UE方式进行通信的资源；
eRelay UE请求的资源的应用场景，例如是用于Commerical应用的通信还是用于Public Safety应用的通信。
其中，eRelay UE收到eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，如果eRelay UE此时处于RRC_IDLE状态，则eRelay UE首先通过RRC连接建立过程进入RRC_CONNECTED状态。此后，eRelay UE再向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。
S905、基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息，以给eRelay UE配置eRelay UE与eRemote UE通信所采用的资源分配方式。则eRelay UE接收该第四消息。例如第四消息为RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。
S906、eRelay UE按照RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息中的内容进行配置，且eRelay UE在基站分配的资源池中或者在基站调度的资源上向eRemote UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息。则eRemote UE接收该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_ACCEPT消息。
在如上的过程中，eRemote UE保持与基站之间通过直连通信链路传输数据。
S907、eRemote UE按照第二消息中的内容进行配置，配置完成后，eRemote UE通过eRelay UE向基站发送RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete消息。则基站接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete消息。
此后，eRemote UE通过eRelay UE与基站传输数据。
其中，当eRelay UE的基站和eRemote UE的基站不是同一个基站时，则eRemote UE的基站在发送给eRelay UE的基站的第六消息中包含S901中eRemote UE发送的第一消息中携带的信息。
本发明实施例中，eRemote UE和eRelay UE建立Sidelink连接后，基站需要获取并保存eRemote UE的标识和eRelay UE的标识之间的对应关系。基于图9所示的eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的Sidelink的连接建立过程，基站获取eRemote UE的标识和eRelay UE的标识，包括但不限于以下几种实现方式：
1、实现方式一:
细化的S901、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S904、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
2、实现方式二。
细化的S901、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S904、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S905、基站接收eRelay UE发送的Sidelink UE Information后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
3、实现方式三。
细化的S903、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息。与该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息承载的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S904、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI。另外，该Sidelink UE Information消息中还可以包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
4、实现方式四。
细化的S903、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息。与该DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息承载的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S904、eRelay UE接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI。另外，在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S905、接收eRelay UE发送的Sidelink UE Information后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
5、实现方式五。
细化的S901、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S904、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外该Sidelink UE Information消息中还可以包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
6、实现方式六。
细化的S901、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S904、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息后，向基站发送Sidelink UE Information消息。在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外，在该Sidelink UE Information消息中，还可以包含向eRelay UE发送DIRECT_COMMUNICATION_REQUEST消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S905、接收eRelay UE发送的Sidelink UE Information后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个 Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
需注意的是，如上的几种实现方式都未画在图9中。
前面介绍了eRemote UE和eRelay UE建立3GPP下的通信连接的过程，下面请参见图10，本发明一实施例介绍eRemote UE和eRelay UE建立通信连接的过程，本发明实施例中的通信连接为non-3GPP技术下的通信连接，例如为蓝牙或WLAN等。
S1001、eRemote UE和eRelay UE之间建立短距离通信连接。
S1002、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送请求消息，该请求消息用于请求eRelay UE为eRemote UE提供Layer 2UE-to-NW Relay支持。则eRelay UE接收该请求消息。该接纳请求消息例如为层2中继请求(layer2 relay request)消息。
S1003、eRelay UE向基站发送RRC消息，以将与eRelay UE建立non-3GPP连接的eRemote UE的信息发送给基站。则基站接收该RRC消息。该RRC消息即为图10中的非3GPP接入信息(non-3GPP Access Information)。
其中，在接收eRemote UE发送的请求消息后，如果eRelay UE处于RRC_IDLE状态，则eRelay UE先发起RRC连接建立过程，转入RRC_CONNECTED状态。在转入RRC_CONNECTED状态后，eRelay UE再向基站发送该RRC消息。而在接收eRemote UE发送的请求消息后，如果eRelay UE已处于RRC_CONNECTED状态，则eRelay UE可直接向基站发送该RRC消息。
S1004、基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。则eRelay UE接收该RRC Connection Reconfiguration消息。
S1005、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送接纳请求消息，以通知eRemote UE，eRelay UE已接纳请求。则eRemote UE接收该接纳请求消息。该接纳请求消息例如为层2中继接纳(layer2 relay accept)消息。
其中，eRemote UE在S1002中发送的请求消息和eRelay UE在S1006中发送的接纳请求消息可以为RRC消息。
S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收该第一消息。该第一消息用于向基站请求进行通信路径转换。
S1007、基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息，该第四消息携带第三承载配置信息以及eRemote UE的标识，另外，第四消息还携带第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息。
其中，当eRelay UE的基站和eRemote UE的基站不是同一个基站时，eRemote UE的基站在发送给eRelay UE的基站的第六消息中包含S1006中的第一消息中携带的信息。
关于S1007和S1008的细节内容，可参考图4所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例、图6所示的实施例、或图7所示的实施例中的相关描述。另外，对于S1008之后的步骤，也可参考图4所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例、图6所示的实施例、或图7所示的实施例。
同样的，本发明实施例中，eRemote UE和eRelay UE建立non-3GPP连接后，基站需要获取并保存eRemote UE的标识和eRelay UE的标识之间的对应关系。基于图10所示的eRemote UE和eRelay UE间的non-3GPP连接建立过程，基站获取eRemote UE的标识和eRelay UE的标识，包括但不限于以下几种实现方式：
1、实现方式一。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的Layer 2 relay request消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个能够在该eRelay UE下唯一识别该eRemote UE的标识，该标识可以称为eRemote UE的Local  ID，关于该标识的描述可参考图8所示的实施例。eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收该第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了non-3GPP连接的eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2ID。
2、实现方式二。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID和向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1004、接收eRelay UE发送的non-3GPP Access Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息，在该RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收该第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了non-3GPP连接的eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2ID。
3、实现方式三。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID和向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收该第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了non-3GPP连接的eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2ID。
细化的S1007、基站接收eRemote UE发送的第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
4、实现方式四。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的Layer 2 relay request消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S1005、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送Layer 2 relay accept消息时，同时将eRelay UE的标识通知给eRemote UE。本发明实施例中，eRelay UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRelay UE的C-RNTI可以在承载Layer 2 relay accept消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了non-3GPP连接的eRelay UE的C-RNTI。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
5、实现方式五。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的Layer 2 relay request消息后，向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE 发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1004、接收eRelay UE发送的non-3GPP Access Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息。在该RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S1005、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送Layer 2 relay accept消息时，同时将eRelay UE的标识通知给eRemote UE。本发明实施例中，eRelay UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRelay UE的C-RNTI可以在承载Layer 2 relay accept消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了non-3GPP连接的eRelay UE的C-RNTI。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
6、实现方式六。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的Layer 2 relay request消息后，向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1005、eRelay UE向eRemote UE发送Layer 2 relay accept消息时，同时将eRelay UE的标识通知给eRemote UE。本发明实施例中，eRelay UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRelay UE的C-RNTI可以在承载Layer 2 relay accept消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE建立了non-3GPP连接的eRelay UE的C-RNTI。另外还可以包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1007、基站接收eRemote UE发送的第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的LocalID的对应关系。
7、实现方式七。
细化的S1002、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息。与该Layer 2 relay request消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的标识。本发明实施例中，eRemote UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在承载Layer 2 relay request消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE在收到eRemote UE的Layer 2 relay request消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI。另外，在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，还可以包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
8、实现方式八。
细化的S1002、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息。与该Layer 2 relay request消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的标识。本发明实施例中，eRemote UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在承载Layer 2 relay request消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI。另外，在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，还包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1004、接收eRelay UE发送的non-3GPP Access Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息。在该RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
9、实现方式九。
细化的S1002、eRemote UE向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息。与该Layer 2 relay request消息一起发送的还包括eRemote UE的标识。本发明实施例中，eRemote UE的标识可以是eRelay UE的C-RNTI。其中，eRemote UE的C-RNTI可以在承载Layer 2 relay request消息的MAC PDU中通过一个MAC CE来传输。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的C-RNTI。另外，在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，还包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1007、基站接收eRemote UE发送的第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
10、实现方式十。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的Layer 2 relay request消息后，为该eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收该第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
11、实现方式十一。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE在接收eRemote UE发送的Layer 2 relay request消息后，向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1004、接收eRelay UE发送的non-3GPP Access Information消息后，基站为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息。在该RRC Connection Reconfiguraiton消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收该第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
12、实现方式十二。
细化的S1003、eRelay UE向基站发送non-3GPP Access Information消息。在该non-3GPP Access Information消息中，包含向eRelay UE发送Layer 2 relay request消息的eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1006、eRemote UE向基站发送第一消息，则基站接收该第一消息。在该第一消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID。
细化的S1007、基站接收eRemote UE发送的第一消息后，为eRemote UE分配一个Local ID。基站向eRelay UE发送第四消息。在该第四消息中，包含eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRemote UE的Local ID的对应关系。
其中，在如上所述的各种实现方式中，eRemote UE的Layer-2 ID和eRelay UE的Layer-2 ID为 其采用的non-3GPP接入技术中的MAC地址。
需注意的是，如上的几种实现方式都未画在图10中。
下面，本发明一实施例提供一种通信路径转换方法。在本发明实施例中介绍一种比较特殊的情况：eRemote UE向第一基站发送路径转换请求消息，即eRemote UE向第一基站发送第一消息。在当eRemote UE向第一基站发送第一消息之后的t ms，eRemote UE接收第一基站发送的包含移动控制信息(Mobility Control Info)的RRC连接重配置消息，该RRC连接重配置消息用于指示eRemote UE切换到第三基站。然而，如果t值较小，即第一基站在向第三基站发送切换请求消息时，可能还未收到eRemote UE发送的路径转换请求消息，因此，这种情况下，当eRemote UE切换到第三基站后，第三基站并不知道eRemote UE的路径转换请求。那么此时，eRemote UE应如何处理。
一般来说，基站会衡量与eRemote UE之间的通信质量，如果第一基站确定与eRemote UE之间的通信质量较差，或者因为其他一些原因，例如第一基站负载较重等，则第一基站会主动向eRemote UE发送包含Mobility Control Info的RRC连接重配置消息，指示eRemote UE切换到第三基站。那么，如果eRemote UE向第一基站发送了第一消息，在发送第一消息之后的t ms，eRemote UE接收第一基站发送的包含移动控制信息的RRC连接重配置消息，则eRemote UE可以根据t的长度来判断第一基站是否已经将所述路径转换请求消息发送给第三基站。如果t大于或等于T，该RRC连接重配置消息可视为第二消息，那么eRemote UE可以按照图5所示的实施例或图7所示的实施例介绍的方法进行处理，在这种情况下，第三基站与eRelay UE所在的第二基站可以是同一基站。
而，如果eRemote UE确定t小于T，则eRemote UE首先根据该RRC连接重配置消息进行切换，即从第一基站切换到第三基站，关于eRemote UE的切换过程可参考现有技术，不多赘述。在eRemote UE从第一基站切换到第三基站后，eRemote UE向第三基站发送第一消息，即，因为第三基站并不知晓eRemote UE要进行通信路径转换，因此eRemote UE在新的服务小区中重新发送第一消息，以重新请求进行通信路径转换。在这种情况下，第三基站与eRelay UE所在的第二基站可以是同一基站，也可以是不同的基站，关于eRemote UE如何进行通信路径转换，可参考图4所示的实施例-图7所示的实施例中的任意一个实施例的介绍，不多赘述。通过这种方式，保证eRemote UE能够顺利完成通信路径的转换。
其中，T的长度可以由标准或协议预定义，或者也可以由基站通过专用消息或系统消息等配置给eRemote UE。
下面结合附图介绍本发明实施例提供的设备。
图11所示为本发明一实施例提供的计算机设备1100的示意图。计算机设备1100包括至少一个处理器1101，通信总线1102，存储器1103以及至少一个通信接口1104。在本发明实施例中，图11所示的计算机设备1100可用于实现如图4所示的实施例-图10所示的实施例中的任意一个实施例所述的第一用户设备，即eRemote UE，也可用于实现如图4所示的实施例-图10所示的实施例中的任意一个实施例所述的第二用户设备，即eRelay UE，还可用于实现如图4所示的实施例-图10所示的实施例中的任意一个实施例所述的网络设备或第一网络设备，即基站或第一基站。
处理器1101可以是通用的中央处理器(CPU)，微处理器，特定应用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit，ASIC)，或一个或多个用于控制本发明实施例的程序执行的集成电路。
通信总线1102可包括一通路，在上述组件之间传送信息。通信接口1104，使用任何收发器一类的装置，用于与其他设备或通信网络通信，如以太网，无线接入网(RAN)，无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks，WLAN)等。
存储器1103可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的 动态存储设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。存储器1103可以是独立存在，通过总线与处理器1101相连接。存储器1103也可以和处理器1101集成在一起。
其中，存储器1103用于存储执行本发明方案的应用程序代码，并由处理器1101来控制执行。处理器1101用于执行存储器1103中存储的应用程序代码。若第一用户设备、第二用户设备、或第一网络设备通过计算机设备1100实现，则第一用户设备、第二用户设备、或第一网络设备的存储器1103中可以存储一个或多个软件模块，第一用户设备、第二用户设备、或第一网络设备可以通过处理器1101以及存储器1103中的程序代码来实现存储的软件模块，以实现通信路径的转换。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器1101可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图11中的CPU0和CPU1。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，计算机设备1100可以包括多个处理器1101，例如图11中的第一处理器11011和第二处理器11012，其中，第一处理器11011和第二处理器11012。之所以命名不同以及附图标记不同，只是为了区分多个处理器1101。这些处理器1101中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器1101，也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器1101。这里的处理器1101可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
上述的计算机设备1100可以是一个通用计算机设备或者是一个专用计算机设备。本发明实施例不限定计算机设备1100的类型。
请参见图12，本发明一实施例提供一种用户设备，该用户设备包括发送单元1201、接收单元1202和处理单元1203。
其中，发送单元1201，用于向第一网络设备发送第一消息，第一消息用于请求将用户设备与第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径；其中，第一消息中包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、该用户设备的标识、以及该用户设备和第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；第一网络设备与第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备；
接收单元1202，用于接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知该用户设备进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种信息；
处理单元1203，用于根据第一指示信息进行通信路径转换。
在可能的实施方式中，第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；第一无线承载为用于该用户设备和第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载；第二无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
在可能的实施方式中，处理单元1203还用于：
在接收单元1202接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，若第二消息中包含第一指示信息，则使能用于处理通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备间传递的数据的适配层；
若第二消息中包含第一承载配置信息，则根据第一承载配置信息重新配置第一无线承载的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。
在可能的实施方式中，处理单元1203还用于：
在发送单元1201向第一网络设备发送第一消息之前，与第二用户设备建立通信连接。
在可能的实施方式中，处理单元1203还用于：
在接收单元1202接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，与第二用户设备建立通信连接。
在可能的实施方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为同一网络设备；
处理单元1203还用于：在接收单元1202接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，继续通过直连路径与第一网络设备进行数据通信；与第二用户设备建立通信连接；
发送单元1201还用于：通过第二用户设备向第一网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成；
处理单元1203还用于：断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径。
在可能的实施方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，第二消息中包含用于指示该用户设备切换到第二网络设备的信息；
处理单元1203还用于：在接收单元1202接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，继续通过直连路径与第一网络设备进行数据通信；与第二用户设备建立通信连接；
发送单元1201还用于：通过第二用户设备向第二网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成；
处理单元1203还用于：断开与第一网络设备之间的直连路径。
在可能的实施方式中，第二网络设备与第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，第二消息中包含用于指示该用户设备切换到第二网络设备的信息；
处理单元1203还用于：在接收单元1202接收第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，根据第二消息的指示，从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备；与第二用户设备建立通信连接；
发送单元1201还用于：通过第二用户设备向第二网络设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于指示通信路径转换过程已完成。
在可能的实施方式中，处理单元1203还用于：
在与第二用户设备之间的发现过程中获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识；或者，
在与第二用户设备建立通信连接的过程中获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识；或者，
在与第二用户设备建立通信连接后获取第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和第二用户设备的标识。
在实际应用中，发送单元1201和接收单元1202对应的实体设备都可以是图11中的通信接口1104，处理单元1203对应的实体设备可以是图11中的处理器1101。可以认为，在该用户设备通过图11所示的计算机设备1100实现时，图11中的通信接口1104中，有的通信接口1104实现接收单元1202的功能，还有的通信接口1104能够实现发送单元1201的功能。或者可以认为，图11中的通信接口1104中，可能每个通信接口1104都既能实现接收单元1202的功能也能实现发送单元1201的功能。
该用户设备可以用于执行上述图2A和图2B所示的实施例-图10所示的实施例中的任意一个实施例所提供的方法，例如可以是如前所述的第一用户设备，例如eRemote UE。因此，对于该用户设备中的各单元所实现的功能等，可参考如前方法部分的描述，不多赘述。
请参见图13，本发明一实施例提供一种用户设备，该用户设备包括接收单元1301和处理单元1302。
其中，接收单元1301，用于接收第二网络设备发送的第四消息，第四消息携带用于通知该用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及，第三承载配置 信息和第一用户设备的标识；
处理单元1302，用于根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及第一用户设备的标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一用户设备的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在该用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
在可能的实施方式中，
第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；
第三承载配置信息包括：至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；其中，第三无线承载为用于在该用户设备和第一用户设备间的通信链路传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于在该用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
在可能的实施方式中，处理单元1302根据第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及第一用户设备的标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一用户设备的标识和第三承载配置信息配置用于在该用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，包括：
若第四消息中包含第二指示信息，则使能用于处理第一用户设备与第二网络设备间传递的数据的第一适配层；
若第四消息中包含第二承载配置信息，则建立至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道；
重新建立或者重新配置至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道，以及使能处理第四无线承载传输的数据的第二适配层。
在可能的实施方式中，该用户设备还包括发送单元1303，在图13中一并画出。因为发送单元1303是可选的功能单元，为了与必选的功能单元相区分，在图13中将发送单元1303表示为虚线。发送单元1303用于：
在与第一用户设备之间的发现过程中将该用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和该用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备；或者，
在与第一用户设备建立通信连接的过程中将该用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和该用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备；或者，
在与第一用户设备建立通信连接后将该用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和该用户设备的标识发送给第一用户设备。
在可能的实施方式中，该用户设备还包括发送单元1303，可参见图13。
处理单元1302还用于：获取第一用户设备的标识；
发送单元1303用于：向网络设备发送第五消息，第五消息携带第一用户设备的标识和该用户设备的标识中的至少一个。
在实际应用中，发送单元1303和接收单元1301对应的实体设备都可以是图11中的通信接口1104，处理单元1203对应的实体设备可以是图11中的处理器1101。可以认为，在该用户设备通过图11所示的计算机设备1100实现时，图11中的通信接口1104中，有的通信接口1104实现接收单元1301的功能，还有的通信接口1104能够实现发送单元1303的功能。或者可以认为，图11中的通信接口1104中，可能每个通信接口1104都既能实现接收单元1301的功能也能实现发送单元1303的功能。
该用户设备可以用于执行上述图2A和图2B所示的实施例-图10所示的实施例中的任意一个实施例 所提供的方法，例如可以是如前所述的第二用户设备，例如eRelay UE。因此，对于该用户设备中的各单元所实现的功能等，可参考如前方法部分的描述，不多赘述。
请参见图14，本发明一实施例提供一种网络设备，该网络设备包括接收单元1401和发送单元1402。
其中，接收单元1401，用于接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息，第一消息用于请求将第一用户设备与该网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径；其中，第一消息中包含第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、第二用户设备的标识、第一用户设备的标识、以及第一用户设备和第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；该网络设备与第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备；
发送单元1402，用于向第一用户设备发送第二消息，第二消息携带用于通知第一用户设备进行通信路径转换的第一指示信息。
在可能的实施方式中，第二消息还携带第一承载配置信息，第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；第一无线承载为用于第一用户设备和第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载；第二无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
在可能的实施方式中，发送单元1402还用于：在接收单元1401接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息之后，向第二用户设备发送第四消息，第四消息携带用于通知第二用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，第二承载配置信息用于第二用户设备配置无线承载。
在可能的实施方式中，第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置，以及至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；其中，第三无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，第四无线承载为用于第二用户设备和第二网络设备间的通信链路的无线承载。
在可能的实施方式中，该网络设备与第二网络设备为不同的网络设备；
发送单元1402还用于：在向第一用户设备发送第二消息之前，若第一消息携带的第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识指示服务小区为第二网络设备下部署的小区，向第二网络设备发送第六消息，第六消息用于请求将第一用户设备从该网络设备切换到第二网络设备；第六消息携带第一消息中携带的信息；
接收单元1401还用于：接收第二网络设备发送的第七消息，第七消息携带第一承载配置信息。
在实际应用中，发送单元1402和接收单元1401对应的实体设备都可以是图11中的通信接口1104。可以认为，在该用户设备通过图11所示的计算机设备1100实现时，图11中的通信接口1104中，有的通信接口1104实现接收单元1401的功能，还有的通信接口1104能够实现发送单元1402的功能。或者可以认为，图11中的通信接口1104中，可能每个通信接口1104都既能实现接收单元1401的功能也能实现发送单元1402的功能。
该网络设备可以用于执行上述图2A和图2B所示的实施例-图10所示的实施例中的任意一个实施例所提供的方法，例如可以是如前所述的基站或第一基站。因此，对于该用户设备中的各单元所实现的功能等，可参考如前方法部分的描述，不多赘述。
本发明实施例中，如果第一用户设备请求进行路径转换，那么网络设备会向第一用户设备发送第二消息，指示第一用户设备将通信路径由直连路径转换为非直连路径，也就是由网络设备来指示第一用户设备何时进行路径转换，而不是由第一用户设备自行确定何时进行转换，那么网络设备就可以根据业务进行调度，从而尽量保证第一用户设备在路径转换前后的业务的连续性。
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质，其中，该计算机存储介质可存储有程序，该程序执行时包括如前的任意一个方法实施例中记载的第一用户设备(即eRemote UE)所执行的全部步骤。
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质，其中，该计算机存储介质可存储有程序，该程序执行时包括如前的任意一个方法实施例中记载的第二用户设备(即eRelay UE)所执行的全部步骤。
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质，其中，该计算机存储介质可存储有程序，该程序执行时包括如前的任意一个方法实施例中记载的第一网络设备(即基站，或部分实施例中的第一基站)所执行的全部步骤。
本领域内的技术人员应明白，本发明实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此，本发明实施例可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且，本发明实施例可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。
本发明实施例是参照根据本发明实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器，使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中，使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品，该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上，使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理，从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。
显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本发明实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样，倘若本发明实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (31)

  1. 一种通信路径转换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一用户设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于请求将所述第一用户设备与所述第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径；其中，所述第一消息中包含所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、所述第二用户设备的标识、所述第一用户设备的标识、以及所述第一用户设备和所述第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备；
    所述第一用户设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息，所述第二消息携带用于通知第一用户设备进行所述通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种信息；
    所述第一用户设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述第一承载配置信息中的至少一种进行所述通信链路转换。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；所述第一无线承载为用于所述第一用户设备和所述第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载；所述第二无线承载为用于所述第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一用户设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：
    若所述第二消息中包含所述第一指示信息，则所述第一用户设备使能用于处理通过第二用户设备与所述第二网络设备间传递的数据的适配层；
    若所述第二消息中包含所述第一承载配置信息，则所述第一用户设备根据所述第一承载配置信息重新配置所述第一无线承载的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道。
  4. 如权利要求1-3任一所述的方法，其特征在于，在第一用户设备发送第一消息给第一网络设备之前，还包括:
    所述第一用户设备与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接。
  5. 如权利要求1-3任一所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一用户设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：
    所述第一用户设备与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接。
  6. 如权利要求1-5任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备为同一网络设备；在第一用户设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：
    所述第一用户设备继续通过所述直连路径与所述第一网络设备进行数据通信；
    所述第一用户设备与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接；
    所述第一用户设备通过所述第二用户设备发送第三消息给所述第一网络设备，所述第三消息用于指示所述通信路径转换过程已完成，且所述第一用户设备断开与所述第一网络设备之间的所述直连路径。
  7. 如权利要求1-5任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，所述第二消息中包含用于指示所述第一用户设备切换到所述第二网络设备的信息；在第一用户设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：
    所述第一用户设备继续通过所述直连路径与所述第一网络设备进行数据通信；
    所述第一用户设备与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接；
    所述第一用户设备通过所述第二用户设备发送第三消息给所述第二网络设备，所述第三消息用于指示所述通信路径转换过程已完成，且所述第一用户设备断开与所述第一网络设备之间的所述直连路 径。
  8. 如权利要求1-5任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，所述第二消息中包含用于指示所述第一用户设备切换到所述第二网络设备的信息；在第一用户设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，还包括：
    所述第一用户设备根据所述第二消息的指示，从所述第一网络设备切换到所述第二网络设备；
    所述第一用户设备与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接；
    所述第一用户设备通过所述第二用户设备发送第三消息给所述第二网络设备，所述第三消息用于指示所述通信路径转换过程已完成。
  9. 如权利要求1-8任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一用户设备在与所述第二用户设备之间的发现过程中获取所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和所述第二用户设备的标识；或者，
    所述第一用户设备在与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接的过程中获取所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和所述第二用户设备的标识；或者，
    所述第一用户设备在与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接后获取所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和所述第二用户设备标识。
  10. 一种通信路径转换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二用户设备接收第二网络设备发送的第四消息，所述第四消息携带用于通知所述第二用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及，第三承载配置信息和第一用户设备的标识；
    所述第二用户设备根据所述第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及所述第一用户设备标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据所述第一用户设备标识和所述第三承载配置信息配置用于在第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输所述第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；
    所述第三承载配置信息包括：至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；其中，所述第三无线承载为用于在所述第二用户设备和所述第一用户设备间的通信链路传输所述第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，所述第四无线承载为用于在所述第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备间的通信链路传输所述第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二用户设备根据所述第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及所述第一用户设备标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据所述第一用户设备标识和所述第三承载配置信息配置用于在第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输所述第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，包括：
    若所述第四消息中包含所述第二指示信息，则所述第二用户设备使能用于处理第一用户设备与所述第二网络设备间传递的数据的第一适配层；
    若所述第四消息中包含所述第二承载配置信息，则所述第二用户设备建立所述至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道；
    所述第二用户设备重新建立或者重新配置所述至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道，以及使能处理所述第四无线承载传输的数据的第二适配层。
  13. 如权利要求10-12任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二用户设备在与所述第一用户设备之间的发现过程中将所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和所述第二用户设备的标识发送给所述第一用户设备；或者，
    所述第二用户设备在与所述第一用户设备建立通信连接的过程中将所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和所述第二用户设备的标识发送给所述第一用户设备；或者，
    所述第二用户设备在与所述第一用户设备建立通信连接后将所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识和所述第二用户设备的标识发送给所述第一用户设备。
  14. 如权利要求10-13任一所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二用户设备获取所述第一用户设备的标识；
    所述第二用户设备向所述网络设备发送第五消息，所述第五消息携带所述第一用户设备的标识和所述第二用户设备的标识中的至少一个。
  15. 一种通信路径转换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络设备接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息，所述第一消息用于请求将所述第一用户设备与所述第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径；其中，所述第一消息中包含所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、所述第二用户设备的标识、所述第一用户设备的标识、以及所述第一用户设备和所述第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备；
    所述第一网络设备向所述第一用户设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息携带用于通知所述第一用户设备进行所述通信路径转换的第一指示信息。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息还携带第一承载配置信息，所述第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；所述第一无线承载为用于所述第一用户设备和所述第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载；所述第二无线承载为用于所述第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
  17. 如权利要求15或16所述的方法，其特征在于，在第一网络设备接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息之后，还包括：
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二用户设备发送第四消息，所述第四消息携带用于通知第二用户设备为所述第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，所述第二承载配置信息用于所述第二用户设备配置无线承载。
  18. 如权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置，以及至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；其中，所述第三无线承载为用于所述第二用户设备和所述第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，所述第四无线承载为用于所述第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备间的通信链路的无线承载。
  19. 如权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为不同的网络设备；在所述第一网络设备向所述第一用户设备发送第二消息之前，还包括：
    若所述第一消息携带的所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识指示所述服务小区为所述第二网络设备下部署的小区，所述第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第六消息，所述第六消息用于请求将所述第一用户设备从所述第一网络设备切换到所述第二网络设备；所述第六消息携带所述第一消息中携带的 信息；
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备发送的第七消息，所述第七消息携带所述第一承载配置信息。
  20. 一种用户设备，其特征在于，包括：
    发送单元，用于向第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于请求将所述用户设备与所述第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径；其中，所述第一消息中包含所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、所述第二用户设备的标识、所述用户设备的标识、以及所述用户设备和所述第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备；
    接收单元，用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息，所述第二消息携带用于通知用户设备进行所述通信路径转换的第一指示信息和第一承载配置信息中的至少一种信息；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一指示信息进行所述通信路径转换。
  21. 如权利要求20所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述第一承载配置信息包括：至少一个第一无线承载与至少一个第二无线承载之间的映射关系，及至少一个第一无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；所述第一无线承载为用于所述用户设备和所述第二用户设备之间的通信链路的无线承载；所述第二无线承载为用于所述第二用户设备和所述第二网络设备之间的通信链路的无线承载。
  22. 如权利要求20或21所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于：
    在所述发送单元向第一网络设备发送第一消息之前，与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接。
  23. 如权利要求20或21所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于：
    在所述接收单元接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接。
  24. 如权利要求20-23任一所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备为同一网络设备；
    所述处理单元还用于：在所述接收单元接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，继续通过所述直连路径与所述第一网络设备进行数据通信；与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接；
    所述发送单元还用于：通过所述第二用户设备向所述第一网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示所述通信路径转换过程已完成；
    所述处理单元还用于：断开与所述第一网络设备之间的所述直连路径。
  25. 如权利要求20-23任一所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备为不同的网络设备，所述第二消息中包含用于指示所述用户设备切换到所述第二网络设备的信息；
    所述处理单元还用于：在所述接收单元接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息之后，继续通过所述直连路径与所述第一网络设备进行数据通信；与所述第二用户设备建立通信连接；
    所述发送单元还用于：通过所述第二用户设备向所述第二网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示所述通信路径转换过程已完成；
    所述处理单元还用于：断开与所述第一网络设备之间的所述直连路径。
  26. 一种用户设备，其特征在于，包括：
    接收单元，用于接收第二网络设备发送的第四消息，所述第四消息携带用于通知所述用户设备为第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及，第三承载配置信息和第一用户设备的标识；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，以及所述第一用户设备的标识，配置与第一用户设备间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据所述第一用户设备的标识和所述第三承载配置 信息配置用于在所述用户设备和所述第二网络设备间的通信链路上传输所述第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述第二承载配置信息包括：至少一个第三无线承载与至少一个第四无线承载的映射关系，至少一个第三无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；
    所述第三承载配置信息包括：至少一个第四无线承载对应的无线链路控制实体和逻辑信道的配置；其中，所述第三无线承载为用于在所述用户设备和所述第一用户设备间的通信链路传输所述第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载，所述第四无线承载为用于在所述用户设备和所述第二网络设备间的通信链路传输所述第一用户设备的数据和信令的无线承载。
  28. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    接收单元，用于接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息，所述第一消息用于请求将所述第一用户设备与所述网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径；其中，所述第一消息中包含所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、所述第二用户设备的标识、所述第一用户设备的标识、以及所述第一用户设备和所述第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；所述网络设备与所述第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备；
    发送单元，用于向所述第一用户设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息携带用于通知所述第一用户设备进行所述通信路径转换的第一指示信息。
  29. 如权利要求28所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    在所述接收单元接收第一用户设备发送的第一消息之后，向所述第二用户设备发送第四消息，所述第四消息携带用于通知第二用户设备为所述第一用户设备提供非直连路径支持的第二指示信息和/或第二承载配置信息，所述第二承载配置信息用于所述第二用户设备配置无线承载。
  30. 如权利要求28所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述网络设备与所述第二网络设备为不同的网络设备；
    所述发送单元还用于：在向所述第一用户设备发送第二消息之前，若所述第一消息携带的所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识指示所述服务小区为所述第二网络设备下部署的小区，向所述第二网络设备发送第六消息，所述第六消息用于请求将所述第一用户设备从所述网络设备切换到所述第二网络设备；所述第六消息携带所述第一消息中携带的信息；
    所述接收单元还用于：接收所述第二网络设备发送的第七消息，所述第七消息携带第一承载配置信息。
  31. 一种通信路径转换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一用户设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于请求将所述第一用户
    设备与所述第一网络设备之间的通信路径从直连路径转换为通过第二用户设备与第二网络设备通信的非直连路径；其中，所述第一消息中包含所述第二用户设备的服务小区的小区标识、所述第二用户设备的标识、所述第一用户设备的标识、以及所述第一用户设备和所述第二用户设备间的通信链路所使用的通信技术中的至少一种；所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为同一网络设备或不同的网络设备；
    所述第一用户设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二消息，所述第一用户设备根据所述第二消息进行所述通信路径转换。
PCT/CN2017/091138 2017-01-10 2017-06-30 一种通信路径转换方法及设备 Ceased WO2018129875A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201780014150.XA CN109417695B (zh) 2017-01-10 2017-06-30 一种通信路径转换方法及设备
EP17891329.9A EP3562182B1 (en) 2017-01-10 2017-06-30 Communication path switching method
US16/476,740 US10945179B2 (en) 2017-01-10 2017-06-30 Communication path switching method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710018783.X 2017-01-10
CN201710018783 2017-01-10
CNPCT/CN2017/072864 2017-02-03
CN2017072864 2017-02-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018129875A1 true WO2018129875A1 (zh) 2018-07-19

Family

ID=62839115

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/091138 Ceased WO2018129875A1 (zh) 2017-01-10 2017-06-30 一种通信路径转换方法及设备

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US10945179B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3562182B1 (zh)
CN (1) CN109417695B (zh)
WO (1) WO2018129875A1 (zh)

Cited By (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020101953A1 (en) * 2018-11-13 2020-05-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Ev2x mobility support for mode 3.5/rsu scheduled mode
CN111818594A (zh) * 2019-07-31 2020-10-23 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种网络切换方法、网络设备及终端
CN112616164A (zh) * 2019-10-05 2021-04-06 财团法人工业技术研究院 维持传输服务连续性的方法及服务中心
WO2021088638A1 (zh) * 2019-11-07 2021-05-14 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法、装置及设备
WO2021213206A1 (zh) * 2020-04-20 2021-10-28 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 信息传输方法、终端及网络设备
WO2021213014A1 (zh) * 2020-04-23 2021-10-28 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
WO2021238882A1 (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-02 华为技术有限公司 一种实现业务连续性的方法及装置
CN114080759A (zh) * 2019-07-12 2022-02-22 高通股份有限公司 经由一个或多个中继设备在无线通信设备中的监测条件响应
CN114616841A (zh) * 2019-11-06 2022-06-10 富士通株式会社 一种车辆通信业务的通信方法、装置和通信系统
WO2023011378A1 (zh) * 2020-08-25 2023-02-09 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
CN115942405A (zh) * 2021-08-25 2023-04-07 华硕电脑股份有限公司 远程用户设备支持直接到间接通信路径切换的方法和设备
WO2023134679A1 (zh) * 2022-01-14 2023-07-20 夏普株式会社 由用户设备执行的方法及用户设备
WO2023179599A1 (zh) * 2022-03-24 2023-09-28 维沃移动通信有限公司 多路径建立方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2023221817A1 (zh) * 2022-05-20 2023-11-23 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和装置
WO2024197755A1 (zh) * 2023-03-30 2024-10-03 北京小米移动软件有限公司 指示终端状态的方法、装置和存储介质
WO2024207316A1 (zh) * 2023-04-06 2024-10-10 富士通株式会社 多路径的通信方法以及装置
US12133129B2 (en) 2019-05-29 2024-10-29 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method for determining network switch resource and method for configuring network switch resource
WO2025007624A1 (zh) * 2023-07-04 2025-01-09 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法、装置及系统
US12382365B2 (en) 2020-04-02 2025-08-05 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Information transmission method and communication device

Families Citing this family (59)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3585087B1 (en) * 2017-03-13 2021-05-05 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Data processing method and base station for handling change of radio bearer type
CN114513822B (zh) * 2017-08-11 2024-05-03 华为技术有限公司 一种路径转换方法、相关装置及系统
JP7333324B2 (ja) * 2017-12-22 2023-08-24 中興通訊股▲ふん▼有限公司 ビーム障害回復を実行するための方法および無線通信装置
WO2019136606A1 (zh) 2018-01-09 2019-07-18 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 中继传输的方法和中继节点
US11252777B2 (en) 2019-01-27 2022-02-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Coordinating radio resource control signaling with upper layer direct link establishment procedures
CN111294980B (zh) * 2019-03-28 2022-02-15 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 无线承载建立方法及装置
CN111800756B (zh) * 2019-04-08 2021-12-14 华为技术有限公司 一种数据发送方法、装置及计算机可读存储介质
EP3972346B1 (en) * 2019-08-16 2025-05-14 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Link switching method and communication device
US11956120B2 (en) * 2019-09-30 2024-04-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Indicating sidelink connection loss
KR102295732B1 (ko) * 2019-11-13 2021-08-31 아서스테크 컴퓨터 인코포레이션 무선 통신 시스템에서 사이드링크 전송 리소스를 요청하는 방법 및 장치
CN111901836A (zh) * 2020-02-13 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 链路切换、链路切换配置方法、装置、通信节点及介质
CN111432469B (zh) * 2020-03-05 2022-04-12 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及相关装置
US11825330B2 (en) 2020-03-13 2023-11-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for quality of service support in sidelink communications
US11689957B2 (en) * 2020-03-13 2023-06-27 Qualcomm Incorporated Quality of service support for sidelink relay service
CN115299101A (zh) * 2020-03-20 2022-11-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 一种小区切换方法、终端设备及存储介质
EP4436311A3 (en) * 2020-03-26 2024-12-04 Kyocera Corporation Communication control method
EP4101255A1 (en) * 2020-03-31 2022-12-14 Sony Group Corporation Methods, infrastructure equipment and wireless communications networks
CN115398945A (zh) * 2020-04-15 2022-11-25 瑞典爱立信有限公司 管理副链路通信安全
CN113543207B (zh) * 2020-04-20 2024-02-09 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种信息传输方法、网络设备及终端
WO2021212260A1 (en) 2020-04-20 2021-10-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Mobility handling between uu path and pc5 relay path
EP4158946A4 (en) * 2020-05-29 2024-01-24 Qualcomm Incorporated DRAFT SIDELINK RELAY MOBILITY TRIGGER EVENT
CN113810923B (zh) * 2020-06-11 2024-06-18 维沃移动通信有限公司 承载配置方法、装置及终端
US11259218B2 (en) * 2020-06-29 2022-02-22 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Systems and methods for handover of dual connectivity user equipment
CN113873586B (zh) * 2020-06-30 2024-10-29 华为技术有限公司 一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统
US12007463B2 (en) * 2020-07-27 2024-06-11 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Sensing-assisted positioning of mobile devices
CN114071801B (zh) * 2020-07-29 2024-01-16 华为技术有限公司 一种终端设备的状态指示方法及通信装置
EP4190033A4 (en) * 2020-07-31 2024-08-21 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RADIO CONNECTION
US11792771B2 (en) * 2020-10-23 2023-10-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Transport block forwarding over different air interfaces
US12557166B2 (en) * 2020-12-18 2026-02-17 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Method and apparatus for path switch in a wireless communication system
CN114793350A (zh) * 2021-01-25 2022-07-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 路径切换的方法、终端及网络侧设备
CN116783909A (zh) * 2021-01-28 2023-09-19 中兴通讯股份有限公司 用于ue通信路径选择的方法
CN115119334B (zh) * 2021-03-22 2025-08-22 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 信息交互的方法及装置
CN115150904B (zh) * 2021-03-30 2024-06-04 维沃移动通信有限公司 通信路径的切换方法、装置及终端
CN115226121A (zh) * 2021-04-17 2022-10-21 华为技术有限公司 测量上报方法、装置及系统
GB2606530B (en) * 2021-05-10 2024-06-05 Nokia Technologies Oy Data packet transmission in UE relays
CN115413057B (zh) * 2021-05-27 2024-12-13 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的方法和设备
CN115515094A (zh) * 2021-06-07 2022-12-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 数据传输方法、用户设备、服务节点及存储介质
CN115589584B (zh) * 2021-07-05 2025-12-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 多路径通信方法和设备
WO2023287944A1 (en) * 2021-07-15 2023-01-19 Kyocera Corporation Service continuity from indirect to direct communication triggered by base station request
EP4358640A4 (en) * 2021-07-16 2024-10-30 LG Electronics Inc. CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR JOINT SL-DRX CONFIGURATION IN NR V2X
CN115696480A (zh) * 2021-07-28 2023-02-03 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 一种小区切换方法、终端和网络设备
WO2023010409A1 (en) * 2021-08-05 2023-02-09 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Method and apparatus for wireless communication
WO2023014137A1 (ko) * 2021-08-05 2023-02-09 엘지전자 주식회사 무선통신시스템에서 사이드링크 리모트 ue의 연결 수립과 자원 할당 모드에 관련된 동작 방법
EP4142176A1 (en) * 2021-08-25 2023-03-01 ASUSTek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for a relay user equipment (ue) to support direct to indirect communication path switching in a wireless communication system
CN115884222B (zh) * 2021-09-26 2025-11-25 邦克山科技有限责任公司 一种被用于无线通信的方法和设备
CN115996481A (zh) * 2021-10-19 2023-04-21 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种数据传输方法、装置及终端
CN116133060B (zh) 2021-11-15 2025-10-28 邦克山科技有限责任公司 一种被用于无线通信的方法和设备
CN116233957B (zh) * 2021-12-06 2026-03-20 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输的方法和通信装置
CN116566457A (zh) * 2022-01-24 2023-08-08 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的方法和设备
US20250386389A1 (en) * 2022-06-27 2025-12-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Operation method of remote ue related to timer in multi-path relay in wireless communication system
US20250203701A1 (en) * 2022-07-05 2025-06-19 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving wireless signal in wireless communication system
CN119487967A (zh) * 2022-07-06 2025-02-18 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中发送/接收无线信号的方法和设备
CN117440451A (zh) * 2022-07-15 2024-01-23 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 通信方法、装置及设备
CN117812607A (zh) * 2022-09-26 2024-04-02 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 进入连接态的方法、装置、终端和网络设备
CN117998442A (zh) * 2022-11-02 2024-05-07 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 由第一用户设备或第一网络节点执行的方法及相应设备
CN118042548A (zh) * 2022-11-11 2024-05-14 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 数据传输方法、装置、终端及网络设备
CN119584329A (zh) * 2023-09-07 2025-03-07 维沃移动通信有限公司 网络连接的处理方法、终端及网络侧设备
CN119946753A (zh) * 2023-11-06 2025-05-06 华为技术有限公司 通信方法及相关装置
US12587893B2 (en) * 2024-06-07 2026-03-24 T-Mobile Usa, Inc. Methods and systems for optimizing signaling with traffic detection function

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103813413A (zh) * 2012-11-12 2014-05-21 上海贝尔股份有限公司 基于本地交换来改善数据传输的方法、装置与基站
CN104284321A (zh) * 2013-07-08 2015-01-14 华为终端有限公司 一种路径切换的方法、设备和用户设备
CN104349405A (zh) * 2013-07-23 2015-02-11 华为技术有限公司 传输数据的方法、通信节点和基站
CN104427489A (zh) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-18 电信科学技术研究院 一种通信切换、建立方法及设备

Family Cites Families (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060291412A1 (en) * 2005-06-24 2006-12-28 Naqvi Shamim A Associated device discovery in IMS networks
CN101287284B (zh) 2007-04-13 2012-04-18 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种设备加入无线传输网络的方法
CN100548071C (zh) 2007-09-18 2009-10-07 北京邮电大学 基于中继技术的多频点td-scdma组网及通信的实现方法
US8817745B2 (en) * 2009-06-19 2014-08-26 Blackberry Limited Mechanisms for data handling during a relay handover with S1 termination at relay
CN102215537B (zh) 2010-04-09 2014-06-04 华为技术有限公司 一种切换方法、基站和家庭网关
WO2013113013A2 (en) * 2012-01-27 2013-08-01 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Multi-homed mobile relay
CN104066126B (zh) 2013-03-18 2017-10-20 电信科学技术研究院 一种进行d2d切换的方法、系统和设备
CN103442397B (zh) 2013-08-01 2016-04-27 西安交通大学 Lte-a中继系统的基于辅助载波的协作切换方法
CN104618891B (zh) 2013-11-04 2018-10-19 华为终端（东莞）有限公司 一种通信方法、终端及核心网实体
CN104936267B (zh) 2014-03-20 2018-12-25 中国电信股份有限公司 用于选择中继终端的方法、基站和系统
US20170111273A1 (en) * 2014-03-24 2017-04-20 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Server device and terminal device
CN106797674A (zh) 2014-10-07 2017-05-31 日本电气株式会社 中继无线电终端、核心网装置及其方法
EP3216259A2 (en) * 2014-11-07 2017-09-13 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Optimizations for relay communications
ES2782775T3 (es) 2015-06-11 2020-09-16 Nokia Technologies Oy Métodos para la selección de retransmisión de capa 3
CN105050152B (zh) * 2015-07-14 2017-06-20 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 一种基于d2d中继通信的业务处理方法及装置
WO2017014716A1 (en) * 2015-07-23 2017-01-26 Intel IP Corporation Layer 2 relay protocols and mobility relay method
EP3627723B1 (en) * 2015-07-24 2025-10-15 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America Improved prose relay ue activation
EP3142453B1 (en) * 2015-09-08 2018-05-16 ASUSTek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for triggering radio bearer release by a relay ue (user equipment) in a wireless communication system
EP3148284B1 (en) * 2015-09-25 2020-10-21 ASUSTek Computer Inc. Methods and apparatus for solving mismatch between sidelink buffer status report (bsr) and available sidelink transmission in a wireless communication system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103813413A (zh) * 2012-11-12 2014-05-21 上海贝尔股份有限公司 基于本地交换来改善数据传输的方法、装置与基站
CN104284321A (zh) * 2013-07-08 2015-01-14 华为终端有限公司 一种路径切换的方法、设备和用户设备
CN104349405A (zh) * 2013-07-23 2015-02-11 华为技术有限公司 传输数据的方法、通信节点和基站
CN104427489A (zh) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-18 电信科学技术研究院 一种通信切换、建立方法及设备

Cited By (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11690127B2 (en) 2018-11-13 2023-06-27 Qualcomm Incorporated EV2X mobility support for mode 3.5/RSU scheduled mode
WO2020101953A1 (en) * 2018-11-13 2020-05-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Ev2x mobility support for mode 3.5/rsu scheduled mode
US11234285B2 (en) 2018-11-13 2022-01-25 Qualcomm Incorporated EV2X mobility support for mode 3.5/RSU scheduled mode
US12133129B2 (en) 2019-05-29 2024-10-29 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method for determining network switch resource and method for configuring network switch resource
TWI908732B (zh) * 2019-07-12 2025-12-21 美商高通公司 經由一或多個中繼設備在無線通訊設備中的監測條件回應
CN114080759B (zh) * 2019-07-12 2024-03-22 高通股份有限公司 经由一个或多个中继器在无线通信设备中的监测条件响应
CN114080759A (zh) * 2019-07-12 2022-02-22 高通股份有限公司 经由一个或多个中继设备在无线通信设备中的监测条件响应
CN111818594A (zh) * 2019-07-31 2020-10-23 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种网络切换方法、网络设备及终端
US12262394B2 (en) 2019-07-31 2025-03-25 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. Network switching method
EP4007372A4 (en) * 2019-07-31 2022-09-14 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD, NETWORK DEVICE AND TERMINAL
CN112616164A (zh) * 2019-10-05 2021-04-06 财团法人工业技术研究院 维持传输服务连续性的方法及服务中心
CN112616164B (zh) * 2019-10-05 2023-11-14 财团法人工业技术研究院 维持传输服务连续性的方法及服务中心
CN114616841A (zh) * 2019-11-06 2022-06-10 富士通株式会社 一种车辆通信业务的通信方法、装置和通信系统
US12245107B2 (en) 2019-11-06 2025-03-04 Fujitsu Limited Communication apparatus and method of V2X services and communication system
CN114616841B (zh) * 2019-11-06 2024-12-31 富士通株式会社 一种车辆通信业务的通信方法、装置和通信系统
WO2021088638A1 (zh) * 2019-11-07 2021-05-14 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法、装置及设备
US12382365B2 (en) 2020-04-02 2025-08-05 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Information transmission method and communication device
US12520356B2 (en) 2020-04-20 2026-01-06 Datang Mobile Communications Equipment Co., Ltd. Information transmission method, terminal and network device
WO2021213206A1 (zh) * 2020-04-20 2021-10-28 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 信息传输方法、终端及网络设备
WO2021213014A1 (zh) * 2020-04-23 2021-10-28 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
CN113747516A (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-03 华为技术有限公司 一种实现业务连续性的方法及装置
WO2021238882A1 (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-02 华为技术有限公司 一种实现业务连续性的方法及装置
WO2023011378A1 (zh) * 2020-08-25 2023-02-09 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
CN115942405A (zh) * 2021-08-25 2023-04-07 华硕电脑股份有限公司 远程用户设备支持直接到间接通信路径切换的方法和设备
WO2023134679A1 (zh) * 2022-01-14 2023-07-20 夏普株式会社 由用户设备执行的方法及用户设备
WO2023179599A1 (zh) * 2022-03-24 2023-09-28 维沃移动通信有限公司 多路径建立方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2023221817A1 (zh) * 2022-05-20 2023-11-23 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和装置
WO2024197755A1 (zh) * 2023-03-30 2024-10-03 北京小米移动软件有限公司 指示终端状态的方法、装置和存储介质
WO2024207316A1 (zh) * 2023-04-06 2024-10-10 富士通株式会社 多路径的通信方法以及装置
WO2025007624A1 (zh) * 2023-07-04 2025-01-09 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法、装置及系统

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP3562182A1 (en) 2019-10-30
CN109417695A (zh) 2019-03-01
US20190387446A1 (en) 2019-12-19
EP3562182B1 (en) 2020-09-16
US10945179B2 (en) 2021-03-09
EP3562182A4 (en) 2019-10-30
CN109417695B (zh) 2020-10-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN109417695B (zh) 一种通信路径转换方法及设备
KR102261172B1 (ko) 통신 방법 및 장치
US9832807B2 (en) Method and device for mode switching
CN109076496B (zh) 用于改变终端连接状态的方法和装置
CN112055423B (zh) 一种通信方法及相关设备
CN103891344B (zh) 一种多用户协作通信的方法、设备及系统
EP3301966B1 (en) Radio access network device, data processing method and ip packet processing method
CN108184249B (zh) 回程链路的信息传输方法及系统、代理设备、接入设备
CN112788745A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN114631341B (zh) 多sim装置的关系指示
US10425881B2 (en) User terminal, network apparatus, and processor
CN113747516B (zh) 一种实现业务连续性的方法及装置
WO2015018304A1 (zh) 一种配置承载的方法和设备
CN111901895B (zh) 一种建立用户面的方法及装置
WO2023137579A1 (zh) 紧急业务的提供方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN114071595B (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
CN116963204A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2019153924A1 (zh) 一种中继场景下的资源分配方法、装置及设备
JP2023006096A (ja) 基地局及び通信制御方法
CN115918171B (zh) 通信方法及装置
CN111901899B (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN120730398A (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
CN120730543A (zh) 通信方法、通信装置和计算机可读存储介质
CN121310307A (zh) 一种通信方法、通信装置和通信系统
WO2024019062A1 (ja) 通信装置、基地局及び通信方法

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17891329

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017891329

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20190725